B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

IMUX 2000

Intelligent T1 Multiplexer

With Digital Access Cross-Connect

(M-DACS)

NOTICE

RFL Electronics Inc.

353 Powerville Road ● Boonton Twp., NJ 07005-9151 USA

Tel: 973.334.3100 ● Fax: 973.334.3863

Email:

sales@rflelect.com

Publication Number MC MDACS-T1

Printed in U.S.A.

Revised January 1, 2013

●

www.rflelect.com

RFL Electronics Inc.

(973) 334-3100

Table of Contents

Need help?

Do you have a question about the IMUX 2000 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for RFL Electronics IMUX 2000

Page 1 This manual has been compiled and checked for accuracy. The information in this manual does not constitute a warranty of performance. RFL Electronics Inc. reserves the right to revise this manual and make changes to its contents from time to time. We assume no liability for losses incurred as a result of out-of-date or incorrect information contained in this manual.
Page 2 RFL will repair or, at its option, replace components that prove to be defective at no cost to the Customer. All equipment returned to RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 3 Read the safety summary on the reverse of this page M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. January 1, 2013 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 4 Failure to comply with these precautions, or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of this product. RFL Electronics Inc. assumes no liability for failure to comply with these requirements.
Page 5 RFL products are not designed for safety critical direct control of nuclear reactors and should not be used as such. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. January 1, 2013 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 6 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. January 1, 2013 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 7: Table Of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................vii LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS............................ix LIST OF TABLES ..............................xi Section 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................ 1-1 Section 2. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF THE IMUX 2000 (M-DACS) ............2-1 2.1 INTRODUCTION..............................2-1 2.2 MULTIPLEXER CONFIGURATIONS AND SYSTEMS..................2-1 2.3 M-DACS MULTIPLEXER COMPONENTS......................2-22 2.4 M-DACS CHASSIS, FRONT-PANEL SWITCHES, INDICATORS, AND JACKS ...........
Page 8 TMX/TMR Section 15. VIDEO MODULES .......................... 15-1 Variable Video System M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. January 1, 2013 viii (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 9 Figure 2-22. MA-810 Module Adapter Connectors ......................2-42 Figure 2-23. SNMP Access Gateway DB9 Pin Out ......................2-43 Figure 2-24. Functional diagram, IMUX 2000 M-DACS Power Supply and Power Supply Alarm I/O module ....2-44 Figure 2-25. Typical Power Supply Alarm I/O module, rear panel view................2-46 Figure 2-26.
Page 10 Figure 7-2. M-DACS chassis mounting dimensions ......................7-4 Figure 7-3. Terminal strip power connections IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexers with single power supply modules ..7-7 Figure 7-4. Teminal strip power connections IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexers with redundant power supply modules7-8 Figure 7-5.
Page 11 Figure 8-6. Testing channel modules using a local T1 loopback ..................8-10 Figure 9-1. Schematic, IMUX 2000 M-DACS Power Supply (Drawing No. D-105499-1-G, Sheet 1 of 2) ....9-11 Figure 9-2. Schematic, IMUX 2000 Power Supply, 24Vdc 48/125 Vdc and 120 Vac High Power ........9-15 Figure 9-3.
Page 12 Table 8-2. CM4 Status Messages ............................8-15 Table 9-1. Power Supply And Power Supply Alarm I/O, General Information ..............9-1 Table 9-2. IMUX 2000 M-DACS Power Supply Specifications..................9-2 Table 9-3. Power Supply Alarm I/O Application Information..................... 9-9 Table 9-4. Power Supply and Power Supply Alarm I/O Schematics ................. 9-10 M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 13 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES When revisions are made to the IMUX 2000 Instruction Manual, the entire section where revisions were made is replaced. For the edition of this manual dated January 1, 2013, the sections are dated as follows: Front Matter...
Page 14: January
Section 2 updated, data sheet VF-5C and NCM revised. 1-1-13 M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. January 1, 2013 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 15: Section 1. Product Information
Section 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 16 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 17 Spur, Hot Standby and Designed for harsh environments, the new IMUX 2000 Ring topologies. The IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS is both T1/E1 MDACS creates a new class of Intelligent Multi- hardware and software configurable. The unit offers the...
Page 18 Protective Relaying. • CSU Functionality The IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS offers a built in CSU func- • SONET and SDH Applications tionality that meets applicable standards for protection in-...
Page 19 4-wire analog transfer trip channels and older digital equipment (with limited error checking). These features in the IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS, address the critical time is- sues associated with protective relaying, making it ideal to be used in the electric power utilities industry. In addition, the multiplexer has the Transfer Trip and Current Differen- tial interfaces required for the utility market.
Page 20 The IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS’ are configured to work in a Point-to-Point, Star and Stand-Alone 2- Fiber Loop topology over the SONET/SDH system. The IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS carries RTU and phone circuits from several substations to the operations center. It also carries current differential relay data between substations.
Page 21 April 2005 IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 22 April 2005 IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 23 April 2005 IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 24 April 2005 IMUX 2000 T1/E1 MDACS B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 25: Section 2. Functional Description Of The Imux 2000 (M-Dacs)
Figure 2-1. Front panel of IMUX 2000 M-DACS 2.1 INTRODUCTION This section gives a functional description of the IMUX 2000 M-DACS, including how the unit can be configured for point-to-point, drop/insert, or Bi-directional Line Switch Ring using electrical and/or fiber T1 interfaces. This section also defines all common equipment, connectors, switches, and indicators used in the IMUX 2000 M-DACS.
Page 26 Note from the above discussion that a T1 network can have between 23 and 24 time slots available for user payload depending on the system configuration. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 27: Figure 2-2. Functional Diagram Of Drop/Insert Section Of M-Dacs
Figure 2-2. Functional diagram of Drop/Insert section of M-DACS 2.2.4 POINT-TO-POINT SYSTEMS The simplest type of IMUX 2000 M-DACS system configuration is a point-to-point system. A point- to-point system consists of two M-DACS multiplexers connected by a single T1 electrical or fiber optic circuit.
Page 28: Figure 2-3. Functional Diagram Of A Point-To-Point System
LOCATION 1 LOCATION 2 IMUX 2000 M-DACS IMUX 2000 M-DACS MULTIPLEXER MULTIPLEXER T1 CIRCUIT D OW VOICE 1 VOICE 1 DATA 1 DATA 1 ORDER WIRE ORDER WIRE VOICE 2 VOICE 2 DATA 2 DATA 2 Figure 2-3. Functional diagram of a point-to-point system...
Page 29 Refer to paragraph 2.2.9 for more detail on DACS module mapping. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 30: Figure 2-5. Sample Mapping Of Dacs Module In Cross-Connect Mode
B. Pass-Thru and Hairpinning Figure 2-5. Sample mapping of DACS module in Cross-connect mode. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 31: Figure 2-6. Simplified Diagram Of Dacs Module In Ils Mode
2-6c. Switched upon failure of Port 4 Figure 2-6. Simplified diagram of DACS module in ILS mode. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 32: Figure 2-7. Dacs Module Cross-Connect And Line-Switch Mode Data Paths
A comparison of the characteristics of each of the two modes is shown in Table 2-1. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 33: Table 2-1. Comparison Of Cross-Connect And Line-Switch Modes Of Operation
DACS module). module). M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 34: Figure 2-8. Dacs Module Paths And Port Numbers
MULTIPLEXER DI-B Figure 2-8. DACS module paths and port numbers M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-10 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 35 50 ms period after errors are cleared to allow the fellow transceiver to fully reframe. Then it waits an extra recovery time before going fully on line. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-11 (973) 334-3100...
Page 36: Figure 2-9. A Typical Dacs Module And Its Active Map
Timeslot 24 Example 3 Figure 2-9. A typical DACS module and its active map. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-12 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 37 When a DACS module detects a port failure, the failed port switches from Map 0 to an alternate map (Map 1 to Map 7). The map switching takes place in accordance with Map Select Criteria, which must be programmed by the user using NMS. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-13 (973) 334-3100...
Page 38: Figure 2-10. M-Dacs Fiber Ring Configuration Before A Failure (Sample Configuration)
M-DACS C Note: M-DACS B and M-DACS D do not drop/insert data. Figure 2-10. M-DACS fiber ring configuration before a failure (sample configuration) M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-14 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 39: Figure 2-11. M-Dacs Fiber Ring Configuration After A Failure (Sample Configuration)
M-DACS C = mono-directional Figure 2-11. M-DACS fiber ring configuration after a failure (sample configuration) M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-15 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 40: Table 2-2. M-Dacs A, Map 0
0,FF 8,24 0,FF M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-16 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 41: Table 2-3. M-Dacs A, Map 1
0,FF 8,24 0,FF M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-17 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 42: Table 2-4. M-Dacs B, Map 0
0,FF 8,24 0,FF M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-18 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 43: Table 2-5. M-Dacs B, Map 4
0,FF 8,24 0,FF M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-19 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 44: Table 2-6. M-Dacs C, Map 0
0,FF 8,24 0,FF M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-20 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 45: Table 2-7. M-Dacs D, Map 0
0,FF 8,24 0,FF M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-21 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 46: M-Dacs Multiplexer Components
Each of these components is described in the paragraphs that follow. 2.3.1 M-DACS SHELF The Main Shelf is the enclosure for the IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexer. It has plug-in slots in the front for one main power supply and one optional redundant power supply. It also provides 18 physical slots for the DACS module,T1 common modules (CM4s), and channel modules.
Page 47: Figure 2-12. Front And Rear Views Of M-Dacs Shelf
P.S. REDUNDANT M-DACS SHELF REAR VIEW Figure 2-12. Front and rear views of M-DACS shelf M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-23 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 48 MA-240 which resides at the rear of the M-DACS chassis slot 5. This is used to configure the DACS module or to poll the DACS module for status information. This module has no hardware configurable items. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-24 (973) 334-3100...
Page 49: Figure 2-13. M-Dacs Processor Module
For factory use only. For factory use only. For factory use only. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-25 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 50: Figure 2-14. M-Dacs Framer Module
For factory use only. TP10 For factory use only. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-26 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 51 MA-235 and may optionally provide other functions, such as an additional timing source. Each M-DACS multiplexer contains two CM4 Common Modules. The CM4 is the standard T1 Common Module for the IMUX 2000 M-DACS. It provides the following operational functions:...
Page 52: Figure 2-15. Functional Diagram, Cm4 Common Module, Communications Control
(RS-422) CM4 Status and Control Bus Figure 2-15. Functional diagram, CM4 Common Module, Communications Control M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-28 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 53 Bus signals include demultiplexed channel data, demultiplexer synchronization status, and synchronization signals necessary for proper decoding by the channel modules. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-29 (973) 334-3100...
Page 54: Figure 2-16. The Meaning Of Bus A And Bus B Channel Module Settings
LOOP is the primary timing setting. Refer to paragraph 5.5.3.7.1.1 for suggested settings of fallback timing. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-30 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™...
Page 55 Front Panel Interface appear in Section 4 of this manual. RS-232 Interface - The IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexer can be set up and monitored from a data terminal connected to its RS-232 port. This connection can be made locally at the controlled multiplexer shelf, or remotely at any other node of the T1 network.
Page 56 Count of received bipolar violation Count of received bit error Count of received multiframe out of sync M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-32 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 57 The download function allows a user to update CM4 application code by using a terminal emulation package containing the XMODEM transfer protocol. Contact RFL customer service for more information. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-33 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 58: Figure 2-17. Ma-235/Ma-240 Rear Panel View With Pinouts
RS232RXD RS232TXD Figure 2-17. MA-235/MA-240 rear panel view with pinouts M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-34 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 59: Figure 2-18. Dacs Ma-260, Ma-262 And Ma-263-Line I/Os, Rear Panel Views And Jumper Settings
MA263 adapter is used there are 2-jumpers to set, J2 and J3. Figure 2-18. DACS MA-260, MA-262 and MA-263-Line I/Os, rear panel views and jumper settings M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-35 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 60 2.3.4.3 OPTICAL INTERFACE ADAPTERS (OIA)S Optical interface adapters are used to connect the IMUX 2000 M-DACS to a T1 network using fiber optic cables. There are six types of optical interface adapters available. Figure 2-19 shows the rear panel view of a typical Fiber I/O module. Table 2-10 summarizes the characteristics of the various Fiber I/O modules.
Page 61: Figure 2-19. Typical M-Dacs Optical Interface Adapter, Rear Panel View
When connecting fiber optic cables, make sure the connectors are properly aligned before tightening and then fully tighten them. This will help minimize losses in the connector. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-37 (973) 334-3100...
Page 62: Table 2-10. Characteristics Of Imux 2000 Optical Interface Adapters
Table 2-10. Characteristics of IMUX 2000 Optical Interface Adapters Receiver Typical Distance Assembly Wavelength/ Connector Tx Power Type Sensitivity System Gain (3dB margin) Number Mode Type (average) (average) 107455-100 850 nm/ Emitter/Detector multimode -50 dBm -13dBm 37dB 5 mi (8 km)
Page 63: Figure 2-20. Sag Module Used In M-Dacs
Port 2 TX LED Power LED Figure 2-20. SAG module used in M-DACS M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-39 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 64: Table 2-11. Sag Module Controls And Indicators
Normally ON constantly with a quick flash every ten seconds. *Note: See the RFL IMUX 2000 SNMP Access Gateway User’s Manual for additional information on these LEDs. One of the serial ports (I/O 2) may also be used as a local command port, for configuration or checking on the status of the device.
Page 65: Figure 2-21. Sag Module Connectivity Overview
M-DACS, which in turn, allows the gateway to generate SNMP traps as a result of a message from the M-DACS. These traps will contain data that defines the fault condition on the M-DACS. More information on the SAG is contained in the RFL IMUX 2000 SNMP Access Gateway User’s Manual.
Page 66: Figure 2-22. Ma-810 Module Adapter Connectors
I/O 2 RJ-12 PINOUTS Figure 2-22. MA-810 Module Adapter Connectors M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-42 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 67: Figure 2-23. Snmp Access Gateway Db9 Pin Out
Gateway will often have a pair of screw-down cable locks. These cable locks should be used to assure a solid connection of the cable with the SNMP Access Gateway serial port connectors. Figure 2-23. SNMP Access Gateway DB9 Pin Out M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-43 (973) 334-3100...
Page 68: Figure 2-24. Functional Diagram, Imux 2000 M-Dacs Power Supply And Power Supply Alarm I/O Module
The Main Shelf can contain one or two power supplies with the same capacity. A functional block diagram of the IMUX 2000 M-DACS Power Supply and the Power Supply Alarm I/O module appears in Figure 2-24.
Page 69: Table 2-12. Characteristics Of Power Supply Alarm I/O Modules
2.3.7 POWER SUPPLY ALARM I/O MODULES There are six types of Power Supply Alarm I/O modules that can be used with the IMUX 2000 M- DACS Multiplexer chassis. Some of the characteristics of these modules are listed in Table 2-13. A rear panel view of the 9547-18801 Power Supply Alarm I/O module is shown in Figure 2-25.
Page 70: Figure 2-25. Typical Power Supply Alarm I/O Module, Rear Panel View
P.S. MAIN P.S. REDUNDANT Figure 2-25. Typical Power Supply Alarm I/O module, rear panel view M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-46 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 71: Figure 2-26. Side View Of M-Dacs Shelf, Showing Insertion Of Modules And Module Adapters
18), for the channel modules, one corresponding to each of the 13 front-access module slots. All IMUX 2000 Module Adapters have the same connector on their front edge to mate with the back plane. However, different Module Adapters have different rear edge connectors, providing a variety of interfaces.
Page 72: M-Dacs Chassis, Front-Panel Switches, Indicators, And Jacks
2.4 M-DACS CHASSIS, FRONT-PANEL SWITCHES, INDICATORS, AND JACKS Figure 2-27 is a front view of the IMUX 2000 M-DACS with its front door open. The main power supply module, The DACS module, and the CM4 common module are expanded to show the location of all front panel switches, indicators, and jacks.
Page 73: Figure 2-28. Front View Of M-Dacs Shelf With Door Closed, Showing The System Status Indicators
2.4.1 SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS AND THE ACO SWITCH When the IMUX 2000 M-DACS Shelf front door is closed, four LED indicators are visible. These LEDs are labeled: POWER, NORMAL, ALERT, and ALARM, as shown in Figure 2-28, and indicate the operational status of the M-DACS multiplexer at a glance. Table 2-14 gives a description of these indicators and also includes a description of the power supply fail indicator and the alarm cutoff switch.
Page 74: Table 2-13. System Status Indicators And The Aco Switch
NO TRANSMIT OUTPUT (TX OUT indicator off) DACS MODULE IN ALARM CONDITION (4) See Notes on next page. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-50 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 75 • Configuration checksum failure – failure of non-volatile RAM. Effective March 06 for Motherboard 107665 Rev C and up. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-51 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 76: Table 2-14. T1 Test And Monitor Bantam Jacks
T1 IN MON Used for in-service, non-intrusive (resistor-isolated) monitoring of the T1 signal received by the CM4. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-52 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 77: Table 2-15. Indicators And Toggle Switches Used To Display And Set T1 Common Module Functions
NOTE: When you are facing the front of the multiplexer, the "up" position of each toggle switch or slide switch is to the right, and its "down" position is to the left. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-53 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™...
Page 78: Table 2-16. T1 Common Module Standard Groups And Functions
0x07 (-22.5 dB) Notes: (1) Active on terminal multiplexers only. (2) Active on drop/insert multiplexers only. * Not used in M-DACS. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-54 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 79: Table 2-17. T1 Common Module Supplementary Groups And Functions
Rcpu Reset cpu * Not used in M-DACS. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-55 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 80: Table 2-18. T1 Receive Status Functions
T1 signal timing: GREEN: The transmitter and receiver timing clocks are locked. RED: The transmitter and receiver timing clocks are not locked. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-56 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 81: Figure 2-29. Overview Of Cm4 Groups And Functions
Note: m = msec exit Figure 2-29. Overview of CM4 Groups and Functions M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-57 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 82: Table 2-20. Loop, Internal And External Indicators
E1 transmitter is externally timed. Blinks when EXT is the primary timing mode, but the CM4 module is in fallback timing mode. * Not used in M-DACS. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-58 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 83: Table 2-21. Tx, Lpbk And Err Indicators
When frame format is set to SF, this indicator flashes once each time a frame error is detected, and remains on continuously above a random bit error ratio of about 10 -3 . M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-59 (973) 334-3100...
Page 84: Table 2-22. Rx, Bpv And Frm Indicators
Out-Of-Frame indicator (red). Lights when the CM4 T1 receiver is not in frame synchronization. This can indicate either a high bit error ratio, or improper CM4 configuration. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-60 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 85: Multiplexer, Rear Panel Power And Relay Connections
ALARM relay COM contact (common). ALARM NC ALARM relay N.C. contact (normally-closed). M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-61 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 86: Figure 2-30. Rear Panel Terminal Strips On M-Dacs Poweri/O Module
P.S. MAIN P.S. REDUNDANT Figure 2-30. Rear panel terminal strips on M-DACS powerI/O module M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-62 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 87: Multiplexer, Setup Jumpers And Dip Switches
Note: The external timing output is always in 422 format. All other jumpers are for factory use only. OIAs M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-63 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 88 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 16, 2012 2-64 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 89: Section 3. System Overview
3.1 M-DACS THEORY OF OPERATION 3.1.1 INTRODUCTION The IMUX 2000 M-DACS is a Drop/Insert T1 multiplexer with Digital Access Cross-Connect functionality which also includes an Intelligent Line Switch (ILS) mode for sensitive teleprotection applications where shorter through-delay is required. The M-DACS has a total of eight T1 ports. Two ports (port 5 &...
Page 90: Figure 3-1. M-Dacs Chassis, Front View
(optional) Figure 3-1. M-DACS Chassis, front view M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 91: Figure 3-2. M-Dacs System Block Diagram
DACS module and is required to initialize and monitor the Framer board. The Framer board performs all of the real-time T1 processing. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 92 Refer to the table in paragraph 7.7.1.11 for more information on the port modes. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 93 FLOF: Fast Loss Of Frame is fast and reliable, requires a dedicated a timeslot, and all multiplexers in the network must be set for Fast Reframe. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 94 This requires three lines to identify the port, and five for the timeslot. This constitutes the byte of memory. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 95: Figure 3-3. Mapping Block Diagram
SYSCLK Figure 3-3. Mapping Block Diagram M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 96 This is what constitutes the eight address lines “QA” through “QH” fed into the “R” side of the map memory U11. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 97 3, 4, and 6. This second hot-standby function is fully independent of the first. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 98: Channel Module Types
3.2 CHANNEL MODULE TYPES There are several types of channel modules which can be used with the IMUX 2000 M-DACS Multiplexer. Detailed information on each channel module type appears in the following sections of this manual: Module Type Additional Information...
Page 99: Physical Slots And Time Slots
(or group of time slots) within a T1 circuit, regardless of its physical location (slot) on an IMUX 2000 M-DACS equipment shelf. This makes it important to distinguish physical slots on IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexer shelves from time slots within the T1 circuit.
Page 100: Figure 3-4. Effect Of Direction Settings On Channel Modules
“B” BUS DI-A DI-B CHANNEL MODULES T DATA R DATA “A” BUS CLOCK IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 (DI-B) (DI-A a. Channel modules set to transmit in Direction A, receive from Direction B. DACS MODULE T1 CIRCUIT T1 CIRCUIT CLOCK “B” BUS...
Page 101: Channel Module Configuration Guidelines
3.5 CHANNEL MODULE CONFIGURATION GUIDELINES 3.5.1 PHYSICAL SLOTS The first five slots in an IMUX 2000 M-DACS T1 Multiplexer are reserved for the DACS module and the two T1 Common Module (CM4s). The remaining 13 slots are available for channel modules.
Page 102: Power Available For Channel Modules
To determine how much power the channel modules in a multiplexer shelf will draw, refer to Table 3-1. The current draw at +5V, +15V and –15V for all IMUX 2000 M-DACS channel modules, Common Modules, DACS modules, OIAs and Module Adapters are given in these tables.
Page 103 0.75 0.75 amps@volts If current draw exceeds 4.5 Amps from +5V supply, 0.75 Amps from +15V supply, or 0.75 Amps from –15V supply, additional power supply capacity is required. RFL Electronics Inc. M-DACS-T1 October 25, 2004 3-15 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 104 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 3-16 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 105: July
Section 4. SETUP AND CONFIGURATION 4.1 INTRODUCTION This section contains information on how to set up the IMUX 2000 M-DACS and operate it under local control. 4.2 CM4 MODES A CM4 module can operate in one of two modes: DI-A...
Page 106: Setting Jumpers On The Cm4 Common Module
These are J8, J3 and J4. Refer to Table 4-1 for information on how to set these jumpers. NOTE External timing of the CM4 in an IMUX 2000 M-DACS is not required. External timing is done through the DASC module via the communications I/O (MA-235).
Page 107: Using The Cm4, Group And Set/Next Switches
*Note: This module is installed vertically in the multiplexer. Therefore, “up” means to the right, or away from the circuit board, and "down" means to the left, or towards the circuit board. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 (973) 334-3100...
Page 108: July
GROUP and SET/NEXT toggle switches corresponds to the user's left, while the "up" position corresponds to the user's right. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 109: Setting Cm4, T1 Transmitter Timing (Time Group)
The CM4 modulse may operate in a fallback timing mode if the primary timing source becomes unavailable. The fallback timing for both D/I CM4s should be set to “Loop”. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 110: Setting Cm4, T1 Frame Format And Line Code (Tsel Group)
Note: The RFL, ANSI and ATT line codes are mutually exclusive functions. RFL is the factory-default line code. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 111: Activating And Deactivating Cm4, T1 Loopbacks (Lpbk Group)
Ten minutes after a Line Loopbnack, Payload Loopback or Equipment Loopback is initiated, the loopback times out and resets to non-loopback mode. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 112: Figure 4-3. Signal Flow In Common Module For Various Loopbacks
PAYLOAD LOOPBACK Figure 4-3. Signal flow in Common Module for various loopbacks M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 113: The Meaning Of Blinking Indicators (Blnk Group)
Receive Yellow. When included in the BLNK group, the CM4 receiver detects a T1 Yellow Alarm signal. A Yellow Alarm is produced by some types of T1 equipment, and indicates a loss of frame at the far end. IMUX 2000 multiplexers do not generate a Yellow Alarm upon loss of frame. Rx11 Receive All Ones.
Page 114: Cm4 Performance Data (Rvu1 Group)
The factory-default buffer depth is 32 UI p-p , or about 20.7 ms. ON (green lit)This means the jitter buffer depth has been exceeded. OFF (red lit)This means the jitter buffer depth has not been exceeded. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-10 (973) 334-3100...
Page 115: Cm4 Diagnostic Data (Diag Group)
JBUF (Jitter Buffer Depth) 32 bits To set this function, push up twice on the SET/NEXT switch M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-11 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 116: Setting M-Dacs Multiplexer Network Address (Addr Group)
IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexer, it is not necessary to set up and use the network address. Each IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexer can be assigned a three-digit network address. This can be any number from "001" to "500." Network addresses are used to distinguish the multiplexers connected by a common network to a central controller.
Page 117: Table 4-7. Changing Multiplexer Network Address From 001 To 040
This means that the address on the display is the current address. Note: The underscored digit indicates that it is blinking M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-13 (973) 334-3100...
Page 118: Setting Cm4, Remote Port Parameters (Sio Group)
This can be used to unlock the remote port locally if the remote access password is lost. The IMUX 2000 M-DACS SIO group functions are summarized in Table 4-8. Refer to Section 6 of this manual for details on the remote access and control features available.
Page 119 SET/NEXT switch to leave the BAUD subgroup and display PAR, the next SIO function. To exit the SIO group altogether, press up or down on the GROUP switch. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-15 (973) 334-3100...
Page 120 The fifth function in the PAR subgroup is exit. When the exit function is displayed, you can press up on the SET/NEXT switch to leave the PAR subgroup and display Lock, the next SIO function. To exit the SIO group, press up or down on the GROUP switch. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-16 (973) 334-3100...
Page 121 To exit the Lock function and display the BAUD subgroup, press down on the SET/NEXT switch. To exit the SIO group entirely, press up or down on the GROUP switch. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-17 (973) 334-3100...
Page 122: Figure 4-4. Example Of A Network Management Terminal Which Is Simultaneously Connected To Multiple Imux
PORT Figure 4-4. Example of a network management terminal which is simultaneously connected to multiple IMUX multiplexers. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-18 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 123: Setting The Sqel Function
Module in Drop-and-Insert is extended during recovery, thus delaying the return to normal conditions. Note that this extension takes place only during recovery; loss-of-sync signal is always activated instantly to ensure the fastest transition into a fallback condition. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-19 (973) 334-3100...
Page 124: Table 4-9. Squelch Settings
In applications that use received data without any further checks, such as voice traffic, delays should be extended to prevent noise from appearing as valid transmissions. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-20 (973) 334-3100...
Page 125 After the second press, the green part lights continuously, showing that the timer setting has been changed to the displayed value. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-21 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 126: Setting The Cm4 Interface Function (Intf Group)
TYPE function. To exit the INTF group entirely, press up or down on the GROUP switch. *In T1 mode, selecting a HEAD setting of 75 or 120 results in the selection of a 100 ohm impedance. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-22 (973) 334-3100...
Page 127 SET/NEXT switch to leave the TYPE subgroup and display HEAD, the next INTF function. To exit the INTF group entirely, press up or down on the GROUP switch. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-23 (973) 334-3100...
Page 128 SET/NEXT switch to leave the HEAD subgroup and display TLBO, the next INTF function. To exit the INTF group entirely, press up or down on the GROUP switch. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-24 (973) 334-3100...
Page 129 To exit the TLBO function and display the TYPE subgroup, press down on the SET/NEXT switch. To exit the INTF group entirely, press up or down on the GROUP switch. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-25 (973) 334-3100...
Page 130: Using The Alarm Cut-Off Switch
(non-alarm) state. (See Table 4-10.) The ACO switch on an IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexer may be used to silence a local alarm once this multiplexer has been identified as the source of the alarm. After the alarm or alert producing condition has been fixed, be sure to return the ACO switch to its EN position to re-enable the ALARM and ALERT relays.
Page 131: Displaying And Setting Supplementary Functions
Three members of the supplementary configuration group (Rfrm, Rcht, and Rcpu) are functions themselves. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-27 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 132: Table 4-12. Contents Of The Supplementary Configuration Group
* Indicates factory default settings for these parameters. ** Must be selected in an M-DACS M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-28 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 133: Reset-Chart Procedure For Cm4 Module
ON/OFF SET/NEXT switch Figure 4-6. View of CM4 showing switches used in Reset-Chart procedure M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-29 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 134: Figure 4-7. Overview Of Cm4 Groups And Functions
Note: m = msec exit Figure 4-7. Overview of CM4 Groups and Functions M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. July 18, 2008 4-30 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 135: February
The PC must have a minimum of 8MB of RAM (16MB of RAM preferred). The PC must have Windows version 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, or Windows XP. The hard disk must have at least 40 megabytes of free disk space for the IMUX 2000 Network Management Software. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 136: Software Installation
5.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION This section describes how the IMUX 2000 Network Management Software (NMS) is installed into your PC. The following procedure can also be used to install updated NMS programs into your PC as they are released. Before attempting to install the software into your PC, there are some important facts that must be considered: The software is shipped from the factory on one CD, labeled “SW2000NMXXX”.
Page 137: Figure 5-1. Typical Desktop Showing The Rfl Nms Version 10.3 Icon
Management Software double click on the NMS 10.3 Icon on your desktop, or go to the Start menu and select Programs/RFL IMUX 2000/NMS 10.3. Refer to paragraph 5.4 for information on how to use the Network Management Software. Refer to paragraph 5.5 for an example showing how to configure a typical network using the Network Management Software.
Page 138: Connecting Your Pc To The Network
5.2.2 UN-INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE If for any reason you want to remove the IMUX 2000 Network Management Software from your computer system, go to the Start menu and select Programs/RFL IMUX 2000/Uninstall RFL IMUX 2000. This will cause the Uninstall program to permanently erase all of the programs, icons, directories and files related to the IMUX 2000 Network Management Software from your hard drive.
Page 139: Figure 5-2. Pc Directly Connected To A Node Using An Rs-232 Cable Or An Rj-45 Ethernet Cable
Connecting a PC to the optional MA-490 with or without the NCM. Figure 5-2. PC directly connected to a node using an RS-232 cable or an RJ-45 Ethernet cable M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 140: Figure 5-3. Pc Connected To A Node From A Remote Location
PORT Figure 5-4. Construction of a typical RS-232 cable between the PC and an MA-235 M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 141: Figure 5-5. Pc At A Remote Location Connected To 4 Nodes, Where Each Node Is A Different Network
** Public Switched Telephone Network Figure 5-5. PC at a remote location connected to 4 nodes, where each node is a different network M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 142: Figure 5-6. Pc At A Remote Location Connected To 4 Nodes, Where All Nodes Are In The Same Network
Facility Data Link to operate. Figure 5-6. PC at a remote location connected to 4 nodes, where all nodes are in the same network M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 143: Figure 5-7. Typical Networks And Communications Paths
Note: The numbers in each box represent node numbers Figure 5-7. Typical networks and communications paths M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 144: Using The Network Management Software Icons
Icons listed below. Version 10.3 igure 5-8. Network Management Software Main Window M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-10 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 145 This function can only be used in batch mode, however, an autopolling option is available in real time mode. More information on auto polling can be found later in this section. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-11 (973) 334-3100...
Page 146 (NOTE: Batch is the default mode. The red dot indicates which mode is selected) M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-12 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 147: Example Of Configuring A Network
Connect the PC or laptop to the network either directly or remotely 5.5.3.2 using a modem or an ethernet module. Start the IMUX 2000 Network Management Software from the 5.5.3.3 desktop. Select NEW to start a new configuration. Complete the network 5.5.3.4...
Page 148: Figure 5-9. Basic Drawing Of The Network Used In The Example
Figure 5-9 shows a simplified drawing of the network that will be used for this example. Figure 5-10 shows a more detailed drawing of the network showing all IMUX 2000 M-DACS components, modules, cards and cables used in the network example.
Page 149: Figure 5-10. Imux 2000 M-Dacs Network Example
NODE 2 IMUX 2000 M-DACS MULTIPLEXER D/I-A D/I-B Note: Each network path Port (1 - 4) is equipped with an MA-260 T1 Line I/O. Figure 5-10. IMUX 2000 M-DACS Network Example M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-15 (973) 334-3100...
Page 150 Also make sure that the CM4 D/I-A at node 1 is set to 9600 baud, and that its parity is odd. << text continues on page 5-19 >> M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-16 (973) 334-3100...
Page 151: Figure 5-11. Network Management Software Main Window
Version 10.3 Figure 5-11. Network Management Software Main window M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-17 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 152: Figure 5-12. Edit Network Information Window
Figure 5-12. Edit Network Information Window M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-18 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 153 (Figure 5-12): “Direct” would not be selected, a phone number would be entered, and “{3}” would be entered in the connect string box to indicate that port 3 of the RFL 9660 Digital Switch is connected to the node. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-19 (973) 334-3100...
Page 154 If this is not done, the network configuration information will be lost. A description of how to do this will be described later in this Section. After the network read is complete you will be returned to the main window. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-20 (973) 334-3100...
Page 155: Figure 5-13. Read Network Setup Window
This will allow you to change the configuration parameters of any card in the network in real time which will nominally take under 30 seconds. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-21 (973) 334-3100...
Page 156: Figure 5-14. Auto-Configure Options Window
Figure 5-14. Auto-Configure Options Window M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-22 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 157: Figure 5-15. Network View Window
1 which is located at the upper left of the Network View window. This will bring you to the Display/Change Node window for node 1 as shown in Figure 5-16. Figure 5-15. Network View Window M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-23 (973) 334-3100...
Page 158: Figure 5-16. Display/Change Node Window For Node 1
This will bring you to the Configuration and Status window for the DACS module as shown in Figure 5-17. Figure 5-16. Display/Change Node window for node 1 M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-24 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 159: Figure 5-17. Dacs Module Configuration Window
General, Port 1 to Port 8, Map and RBS (Robbed Bit Signaling). The following discussion covers the settings on the “General” page. Figure 5-17. DACS Module Configuration Window M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-25 (973) 334-3100...
Page 160 Receive Carrier Loss: Enabling this will instruct the DACS module to consider the loss of carrier condition when evaluating which map to use. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-26 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 161 Timing recovered from any of the 8 T1 ports. Note: Refer to paragraph 5.5.3.7.1.1 for T1 Timing Modes M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-27 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 162 Port 1 configuration parameters window as shown in Figure 5-21. After the Port 1 parameters are set, set Port 2 through Port 8 parameters as required. Then set MAP page parameters and the RBS page parameters. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-28 (973) 334-3100...
Page 163: Figure 5-18. Point-To-Point System Timing Setting
“Int” then the secondary clock should be set for “ Not used”. If the primary clock is set for “Ext” then the secondary clock should be set for “Int”. T1 CIRCUIT NODE 2 NODE 1 IMUX 2000 M-DACS IMUX 2000 M-DACS MULTIPLEXER MULTIPLEXER D/I-B...
Page 164: Figure 5-19. M-Dacs Drop/Insert Linear System Timing Setting
NODE 2 NODE 3 D/I-A D/I-A D/I-B D/I-B IMUX 2000 M-DACS IMUX 2000 M-DACS MULTIPLEXER MULTIPLEXER Node 2 M-DACS Node 3 M-DACS Timing Setting Timing Setting CM4s D/I-A & D/I-B CM4s D/I-A & D/I-B Primary Timing = THRU Primary Timing = THRU...
Page 165: Figure 5-20. M-Dacs Ring System Timing Setting
NODE 3 NODE 2 D/I-A D/I-A D/I-B D/I-B IMUX 2000 M-DACS IMUX 2000 M-DACS MULTIPLEXER MULTIPLEXER Node 3 M-DACS Node 2 M-DACS Timing Setting Timing Setting CM4s D/I-A & D/I-B CM4s D/I-A & D/I-B Primary Timing = THRU Primary Timing = THRU...
Page 166: Figure 5-21. Port 1 Configuration Parameters Window For A T1 System
DACS uses ports 1 through 6 only, set the “Port Mode” on ports 7 and port 8 configuration parameters windows to OFF. All other parameters in ports 7 and port 8 windows can be left untouched. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-32 (973) 334-3100...
Page 167 These settings are dependent on your system application. 7. There are two Line Code types for T1. These are B8ZS (Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution) and AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion). These settings are dependent on your system application. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-33 (973) 334-3100...
Page 168 10. There are two Gain Limit settings as follows: -15 dB and -36 dB. These settings are used to set a maximum sensitivity of the electrical DS1 receiver. For optical links these settings are irrelevant. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-34 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™...
Page 169: Figure 5-22. Dacs Module Map Window For Node 1 Of A T1 System
“Write” button at the bottom of the window. Figure 5-22. DACS module Map window for Node 1 of a T1 system M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-35 (973) 334-3100...
Page 170: Figure 5-23. Typical Fdl Signal Routing For Map 0
Then program the FDL/Line Route for “Map 1” through “Map 7” in a similar way depending on your system requirements. After all FDL/Line Routes have been programmed click on “Map Select Criteria”. This will bring you to the Map Select Criteria window as shown in Figure 5-24. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-36 (973) 334-3100...
Page 171: Figure 5-24. Map Select Criteria Window For Map 1 Of A T1 Or E1 System
Map 0 to Map 1 only if Port 1 fails and Port 8 does not fail. Any combination of boxes in columns one and two can be checked or unchecked. Figure 5-24. Map Select Criteria window for Map 1 of a T1 or E1 system M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-37 (973) 334-3100...
Page 172 In the upper right hand box you will see 8,01 which means Port 8, Timeslot 1. In the lower right hand box you will see 8,24 which means Port 8, Timeslot 24. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-38 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™...
Page 173 “Exit” box at the bottom of the window to return to the previous window as shown in Figure 5-22. Next click on the “RBS” tab. This will bring you to the “Robbed Bit Signaling Select” window as shown in Figure 5-26. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-39 (973) 334-3100...
Page 174: Figure 5-25. Dacs Ds0 Map 0 Window For A T1 System
Figure 5-25. DACS DS0 Map 0 window for a T1 system M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-40 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 175 RBS data. This is accomplished by the user specifying which receive ports contain RBS signals. The DACS module then automatically determines which transmit DS0s must contain RBS based upon the DS0 maps. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-41 (973) 334-3100...
Page 176: Figure 5-26. Robbed Bit Signal Selects Window For T1 Systems Only
Figure 5-26. Robbed Bit Signal Selects window for T1 systems only M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-42 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 177: Figure 5-27. Dacs Module Status Window
LEDs. Port 1 to Port 8 status tabs allow the user to monitor the received T1 signal for any errors. Figure 5-27. DACS Module Status window M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-43 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 178: Table 5-2. Status Leds Under Nms Dacs Module Status Screen
Same as above for Port 7. Port 8 Same as above for Port 8. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-44 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 179: Figure 5-28. Alert/Alarm Details Window
Display/Change Node window and click on the CM4 “DI-A” button. This will bring you to the CM4 D/I-A Configuration And Status window as shown in Figure 5-29. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-45 (973) 334-3100...
Page 180: Figure 5-29. Cm4 Configuration And Status Window
VF5A card, first click on VF5C and then click on View. This will bring you to the Configuration and Status window for the VF5C card as shown in Figure 5-30. Figure 5-29. CM4 Configuration And Status Window M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-46 (973) 334-3100...
Page 181: Figure 5-30. Configuration And Status Window For The Vf5C
View. This will bring you to the View or Change a Card window for the VF16B card as shown in Figure 5-29. Figure 5-30. Configuration and Status window for the VF5C M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-47 (973) 334-3100...
Page 182: Figure 5-31. View Or Change A Card Window For The Vf16B
This will bring you to the Configuration and Status window for the DS562I card as shown in Figure 5- Figure 5-31. View or Change a Card window for the VF16B M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-48 (973) 334-3100...
Page 183: Figure 5-32. Configuration And Status Window For The Ds562I
DACS modules maps for Nodes 2, 3, 4 and 5. The list of modules and cards that must be configured for each node are listed in Table 5-1. Figure 5-32. Configuration and Status window for the DS562I M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-49 (973) 334-3100...
Page 184: Figure 5-33. Network View Window After Connecting Lines To Nodes
Add Line button to add connecting lines between nodes. When you are finished connecting lines to nodes, your Network View window should be similar to the one shown below in Figure 5-33. Figure 5-33. Network View window after connecting lines to nodes M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-50 (973) 334-3100...
Page 185 Reports Icon in the Main window. A Report Description window will be displayed. Click on Difference Report and then click on Ok. The Difference Report will then be displayed. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-51 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™...
Page 186: Figure 5-34. Typical Alarm Log Report
03/01/01 15:26:59 Figure 5-34. Typical Alarm Log report M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-52 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 187: Figure 5-35. Page 1 Of Typical Complete Network Information Report
03/20/02 10:09:15 Figure 5-35. Page 1 of typical Complete Network Information Report M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-53 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 188: Figure 5-36. Typical Connection View Report
03/06/01 15:00:54 Figure 5-36. Typical Connection View Report M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-54 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 189: Figure 5-37. Page 1 Of A Typical Dacs Map Report
Figure 5-37. Page 1 of a typical DACS Map Report M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-55 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 190: Figure 5-38. Page 1 Of A Typical Dacs Mapdifference Report
Figure 5-38. Page 1 of a Typical DACS MapDifference Report M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-56 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 191: Figure 5-39. Typical Difference Report
03/01/01 12:10:07 Figure 5-39. Typical Difference Report M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-57 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 192: Figure 5-40. Page 1 Of A Typical Event Log Report
03/01/01 15:26:59 Figure 5-40. Page 1 of a typical Event Log Report M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-58 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 193: Figure 5-41. Typical Network Diagram Report
03/01/01 15:26:59 Figure 5-41. Typical Network Diagram Report M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-59 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 194 Network Management Software, and allows the user to view or print the sequence of events buffer. Page one of a typical Event Log Printout can be seen in Figure 5-40. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-60 (973) 334-3100...
Page 195 The Network Management Software has an Emergency Exit key sequence. If for some reason the user gets “stuck” or a screen freezes, hit <CTRL> <PgDn> then X, and the NMS session will terminate. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-61 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™...
Page 196: Network Management Software Help
Network Management Software Help can also be activated by pressing F1 twice from any sub-menu. This feature will take you to a help screen that is associated with the sub-menu that you were in immediately before F1 was pressed. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-62 (973) 334-3100...
Page 197 What is the IMUX 2000? IMUX 2000 Program Group Learning to use the Menu Options Using the IMUX 2000 Network Management Software Answers to Common Questions 5.6.4 OPERATOR’S MANUALS FROM NMS The Operator’s manuals for all of the IMUX products are available directly from the RFL Network Management Software Help Option.
Page 198: Modules Supported By The Network Management Software
Telnet I/O Network Communication Module M-DACS 8-Port DACS M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-64 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 199: Table 5-3. Cm4 Module Parameters
MAIN COMMON MODULE TROUBLE *See WARNING at bottom of next page >> table continues on next page << M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-65 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 200 CM4 configurations may vary depending on end user requirements. Activating the “Fcty” Function described in Paragraph 5.11 will force settings to values shown in Tables 5-8 and 6- 2. These settings may not be the same as the end user requirements M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-66 (973) 334-3100...
Page 201: Table 5-4. M-Dacs Module Parameters
FDL Line Route Map Select Criteria DS0 Map M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-67 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 202: Password Protection
PASSWORD=PASSWORD Then exit the rfl.ini window and click on the Yes buttons to get back to the main window. The sign on screen will now be bypassed. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. February 28, 2006 5-68 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 203: October
6.2 HARDWARE AND PROTOCOL ISSUES 6.2.1 REMOTE PORT Each M-DACS has one remote port. The IMUX 2000 M-DACS remote port is an RS-232C compatible, asynchronous, serial interface which can operate at baud rates from 110 bps to 115 Kbps. The remote port on each M-DACS module is equipped with a 9-pin male (DB-9) connector, which is located on the MA-235 Module Adapter.
Page 204: Figure 6-1. Local Connection
6.2.2 DATA CIRCUITS For local operation, connect a video terminal or PC directly to the remote port on an IMUX 2000 Series multiplexer (Figure 6-1) using an RS-232 cable. Or, using modems, establish a remote connection over a dial-up voice circuit (Figure 6-2).
Page 205: Figure 6-3. Remote Connection Over A Public Switched Network
Generally, this means that controller software must be designed to wait until it has received a response to the last command sent to a given IMUX 2000 Series multiplexer before issuing another command to the same multiplexer.
Page 206 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 207: Section 7. Installation And Check-Out
Wiring the equipment. Checking the power supply input voltage. Applying input power. Once the IMUX 2000 M-DACS is installed, you can use the check-out procedures starting in paragraph 7.3 of this section to verify operation before placing the equipment in service. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 208 The following paragraphs provides unpacking instructions for individual chassis and interconnected chassis. 7.2.1.1 INDIVIDUAL SHELVES IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexer or DACS chassis supplied as individual shelves are packed in their own shipping cartons: Open each carton carefully to make sure the equipment is not damaged.
Page 209: Figure 7-1. Power Supply Removal And Installation
7.2.2 MOUNTING M-DACS SHELF After unpacking, each IMUX 2000 M-DACS equipment must be securely mounted following the instructions in the following paragraphs. Each IMUX 2000 M-DACS Shelf is normally shipped pre-configured, with common and channel modules already installed. Except for the power supplies, all modules and Module Adapters can remain installed while the Shelf is bolted into its equipment rack.
Page 210: Figure 7-2. M-Dacs Chassis Mounting Dimensions
The type of hardware used will depend upon the particular surface to which the rack or cabinet is being mounted. Because of this, mounting hardware is not supplied with the rack or cabinet. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100...
Page 211 If SIG BAT is the same voltage as the dc power voltage, then SIG BAT may be connected to the -BAT terminal instead. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 212 For dc-powered multiplexers, make sure that a 2-amp slow-blow fuse is placed in line with Station Battery + to protect the multiplexer. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 213: Figure 7-3. Terminal Strip Power Connections Imux 2000 M-Dacs Multiplexers With Single Power Supply Modules
NOTE: This configuration can only be used when the internal –48Vdc source is disabled. Consult RFL technical support personnel for more information Figure 7-3. Terminal strip power connections IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexers with single power supply modules M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 214: Figure 7-4. Teminal Strip Power Connections Imux 2000 M-Dacs Multiplexers With Redundant Power Supply
Connections for ac operation, and 48-Vdc talk current source for external ring generator, and for voice circuits NOTE: This configuration can only be used when the internal –48Vdc source is disabled. Consult RFL technical support personnel for more information Figure 7-4. Teminal strip power connections IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexers with redundant power supply modules M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 215 THE LASER SOURCE IS A CLASS I LASER PRODUCT WHICH COMPLIES WITH APPLICABLE FDA, OSHA AND ANSI STANDARDS. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 216 Connect ALARM and ALERT contacts if used. CAUTION Before attempting to apply input power to the IMUX 2000 M-DACS, you must make sure that its power supply module(s) will operate at the available input supply voltage. If an incorrect power supply module is installed, component damage may result.
Page 217: Figure 7-5. Label On Front Door For Recording Input Voltage Configuration
POWER SUPPLY AND TURN POWER OFF BEFORE REMOVING Figure 7-6. Caution Label inside front door of M-DACS M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 7-11 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 218 Re-insert the main and (if provided) redundant power supply modules into the Shelf. If a local alarm comes on, activate the IMUX 2000 M-DACS alarm cut-off by turning on the ACO switch located on the power supply module.
Page 219: System Check-Out Procedures
7.3 SYSTEM CHECK-OUT PROCEDURES The system check-out procedures in this section are general guides. They illustrate how to check out a typical three-location IMUX 2000 M-DACS Linear system. (See Figure 7-7.) LOCATION 2 LOCATION 3 DATA DATA O.W. DATA DATA O.W.
Page 220 When checking out an IMUX 2000 M-DACS system, follow these overall guidelines: Start at the M-DACS multiplexer where the DACS module primary clock is internally or externally timed (Master clock). Perform the check-out procedures at locations in the order in which they appear in the system.
Page 221 Launch NMS and open the network configuration file for your application by selecting the appropriate .NET file. Using the IMUX 2000 Network Management Software (NMS), download the configuration and status information of the DACS module and the CM4 modules from the M-DACS multiplexer at location 1.
Page 222: Figure 7-8. Cm4 Front Panel Led Indicators
Electrical or fiber optic. In a drop/insert multiplexer, the LOOP indicator actually indicates THRU timing. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 7-16 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 223 Verify that T1 line code and frame format are set up as required for both CM4s (TSEL group). Verify that primary timing on both CM4s are setup for “THRU” (TIME group) M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 7-17 (973) 334-3100...
Page 224 Launch NMS and open the network configuration file for your application by selecting the appropriate .NET file. Using the IMUX 2000 Network Management Software (NMS), download the configuration and status information of the DACS module and the CM4 modules from the M-DACS multiplexer at location 2 or 3.
Page 225: Figure 7-9. Cm4 Front Panel Led Indicators
Electrical or fiber optic. In a drop/insert multiplexer, the LOOP indicator actually indicates THRU timing. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 7-19 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 226 Refer to the individual channel module sections for recommended test procedures. This three-location M-DACS system is now ready for service. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 7-20 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 227: Adding Channel Modules To Existing Systems
Sheets in Sections 11 through 16 of this manual. Use the following setup hints and installation procedures as a general guide when adding new channel modules to existing (in-service) IMUX 2000 M-DACS systems. (See Figure 7-10.) LOCATION 1 LOCATION 2...
Page 228 Remove the channel loopback. If desired, perform end-to-end tests or single-ended (far-end loopback) tests with the other site. Make sure no alarm or alert indicators are on. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 7-22 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 229: Section 8. Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.1 INTRODUCTION This section contains a general approach to troubleshooting the IMUX 2000 M-DACS system, CM4 Common Module diagnostics and DACS module diagnostics. The general troubleshooting section includes an introduction to the use of multiplexer loopbacks, T1 test equipment, and channel test equipment for in-service or out-of-service testing.
Page 230 Use the following hints as general guides when troubleshooting an IMUX 2000 M-DACS system: At each location, verify that the POWER LED on the IMUX 2000 M-DACS Shelf is on. If the POWER LED is off, then there is a power-related problem.
Page 231 1. When possible the signal being received by the M-DACS should be confirmed to be free of errors. This can usually be performed by monitoring the port diagnostics counters using the IMUX 2000 NMS, under the DACS module (Port 1 to Port 8) Status screen, and under the CM4 D/I-A and D/I- B Configuartion/Status screen.
Page 232: Figure 8-2. Using Imux 2000 M-Dacs T1 Loopbacks
LOOPBACK LOOPBACK OR JUMPER CONNECTOR) b. Testing from Location 2 to Location 1. Figure 8-2. Using IMUX 2000 M-DACS T1 loopbacks M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 233 CM4 D/I-A at Location 2 as the likely source of the fault. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 234 To measure performance in the Location 1 to Location 2 direction, connect the DS1/T1 input of a T1 test set to the T1 IN Mon jack on the multiplexer at Location 2. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100...
Page 235: Figure 8-3. In-Service Monitoring Of A T1 Circuit
LOCATION 2 LOCATION 1 T1 TEST IMUX 2000 T1 IN M-DACS CIRCUIT VOICE VOICE DATA DATA CIRCUITS CIRCUITS IMUX 2000 T1 IN M-DACS T1 TEST Monitoring the Location 2 to Location Monitoring the Location 1 to Location 2 1direction of transmission direction of transmission Figure 8-3.
Page 236: Figure 8-4. Out-Of-Service Testing Of A T1 Circuit
LOOPBACK Figure 8-4. Out-of-service testing of a T1 circuit M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 237: Figure 8-5. Testing An Individual Channel On An In-Service T1 System
T1 loopbacks to test individual channels, because all channels on the T1 circuit carrying the channel under test will be out-of-service during the test. LOCATION 1 LOCATION 2 ANALOG OR DATA TEST SET IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 M-DACS M-DACS PATCHCORD / LOOPBACK PLUG...
Page 238: Figure 8-6. Testing Channel Modules Using A Local T1 Loopback
LOCATION 1 ANALOG OR DATA TEST SET IMUX 2000 M-DACS DSX-1 DACS EQUIP Module D/I-A or B JACKS T1 OUT VOICE DATA T1 IN CIRCUITS MANUAL LOOPBACK EQUIPMENT (PATCHCORD) LOOPBACK Figure 8-6. Testing channel modules using a local T1 loopback M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 239: Cm4 Common Module Diagnostics
Alarm may clear after initial indication even if Loss condition continues. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 8-11 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 240 CRC check. This denotes bit errors on the transmit side. SCL: CEBIT M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 8-12 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 241 Fast Enable/Disable configuration in the network. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 8-13 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 242 CRC check. This denotes bit errors on the transmit side. SCL: AEBIT M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 8-14 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 243: Table 8-2. Cm4 Status Messages
OF FRAME synchronization. Only reported by a Common Module set to DI-A mode. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 8-15 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 244: October
Alarm at ILS, most likely due to failed data path. interrupted. Could not be compensated by ILS switching routes. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 8-16 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 245: Fuse Replacement
Input Fuse F1 : 2A, 250V, slo-blo, 5x20mm; Littelfuse 218002 or equiv. (RFL P/N 103389) M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 8-17 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 246: How To Arrange For Servicing
If necessary, Power Supplies and Power Supply Alarm I/O Modules may be returned to RFL for repair. Contact our Customer Service Department using the telephone number listed at the bottom of this page. You will be given an authorization number and shipping instructions. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 8-18 (973) 334-3100...
Page 247: August
9.2 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 9.2.1 DESCRIPTION The 2000 PS power supply modules are the power source for all logic circuits in the IMUX 2000 family, which consists of the Multiplexer, ILS and DACS. As listed above, they are available in both dc-input and ac-input versions.
Page 248: Table 9-2. Imux 2000 M-Dacs Power Supply Specifications
As of the date this manual was published, the specifications shown in Table 9-2 apply to all 2000 PS power supply modules, except where indicated. Because all RFL products undergo constant refinement and improvement, these specifications are subject to change without notice. Table 9-2. IMUX 2000 M-DACS Power Supply Specifications Power High Power Supply→...
Page 249 17V, which then applies a reverse bias to the transistor and cuts off the current. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 250 1.275V is present at this pin. The voltage divider R57, R58 & R59, develop this voltage while compensating for the "ORing" diode voltage drop. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 251 +15-volt load. Switchover occurs quickly and smoothly, preventing system misoperation. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 252 9.2.4 THEORY OF OPERATION (9547-930) The RFL IMUX 2000 M-DACS, 50 Watt power supply is a multiple output, forward, dc to dc converter. The 9547-30 power supply operates from180 to 265 Vac input. The supply has four outputs: 5 Vdc at 4.5 Adc, + 15 Vdc at 1.0 Adc, -15 Vdc at -0.75 Adc, and -48 Vdc at 100 mAdc.
Page 253 9.2.5 THEORY OF OPERATION (9547-965, -975) The RFL IMUX 2000, 75 Watt power supply is a multiple output, forward, dc to dc converter. The 9547-975 power supply operates from a 19 to 29 Vdc input and the 9547-965 power supply operates from a 38 to 150 Vdc input.
Page 254 All outputs have or’ing diodes. These diodes; CR12, CR15, CR18, CR19, allow two supplies to be connected in parallel. Feedback signals for all outputs are taken before the or’ing diodes. M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 255: Alarm I/O Module
9547-18808 9.3.2 THEORY OF OPERATION U51, U52, K51, K52, and their associated components form the alarm I/O circuitry for the IMUX 2000 M-DACS multiplexer. Operation of relays K51 and K52, as well as annunciation indicators DS1 through DS5 are described in Section 2 of this manual.
Page 256: Power Supply Schematics
Figure 9-3, IMUX 2000 Power Supply, 220 Vac D-106824 10-21 Figure 9-4, IMUX 2000 Power Supply Alarm I/O D-105494 10-23 Figure 9-5, IMUX 2000 Power Supply Alarm I/O, 24 Vdc D-106984-1 10-25 M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. ugust 7, 2012 9-10 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™...
Page 257: Figure 9-1. Schematic, Imux 2000 M-Dacs Power Supply (Drawing No. D-105499-1-G, Sheet 1 Of 2)
Figure 9-1. Schematic, IMUX 2000 M-DACS Power Supply (Drawing No. D-105499-1-G, Sheet 1 of 2) M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 9-11 (9-12 Blank) (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 258 Figure 9-1 - continued. Schematic, IMUX 2000 M-DACS Power Supply (Drawing No. D-105499-1-G, Sheet 2 of 2) M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 9-13 (9-14 Blank) (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 259: Figure 9-2. Schematic, Imux 2000 Power Supply, 24Vdc 48/125 Vdc And 120 Vac High Power
Figure 9-2. Schematic, IMUX 2000 Power Supply, 24Vdc 48/125 Vdc and 120 Vac High Power (Drawing No. B-107454-4-H, Sheet 1 of 3) M-DACS-E1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 9-15 (10-16 Blank) (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 260 Figure 9-2. Schematic,IMUX 2000 Power Supply, 24 Vdc 48/125 Vdc and 120 Vac High Power (Drawing No. B-107454-4-H, Sheet 2 of 3) M-DACS-E1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 9-17(9-18 blank) (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 261 Figure 9-2. Schematic, IMUX 2000 M-DACS Power Supply, High Power, 24 Vdc, 48/125 Vdc and 120 Vac (Drawing No. B-107454-4-H Sheet 3 of 3) M-DACS-E1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 9-19(9-20 blank) (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 262: Figure 9-3. Schematic, Imux 2000 Power Supply, 220 Vac
Figure 9-3. Schematic, IMUX 2000 Power Supply, 220 Vac (Drawing No. D-106824-E) M-DACS-E1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 9-21 (9-22 Blank) (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 263: Figure 9-4. Schematic, Imux 2000 Power Supply Alarm I/O
Figure 9-4. Schematic, IMUX 2000 Power Supply Alarm I/O (Drawing No. D-105494-C) M-DACS-E1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 17 2012 9-23(9-24 Blank) (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 264: Figure 9-5. Schematic, Imux 2000 Power Supply, Alarm I/O 24 Vdc
Figure 9-5. Schematic, IMUX 2000 Power Supply, Alarm I/O 24 Vdc (Drawing No. D-106984-1-C) -DACS-E1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 9-25(9-26 Blank) (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 265: Section 10. Reference Data
FRAME 24 ONE T1 EXTENDED SUPERFRAME (24 FRAMES: 4,632 BITS TOTAL) Figure 10-2. T1 Extended Superframe (ESF) format M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-1 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 266: Glossary
Common Channel Signaling Channel Service Unit Control M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 267 Enable Error Extended Superframe M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-3 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 268 MTBF Mean Time Between Failure Network Management Software M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-4 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 269 Receive Received Data Serial Control Bus M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-5 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 270 Unit Interval UNIV Universal Addressing (Universal Parameter) M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-6 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 271: Index
PAYLOAD · 8-3 COMPARISON · 2-8 MODES OF OPERATION · 2-9 M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-7 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 272 SELECTING · 4-16 DACS MODULE · 2-10 PASSWORD PROTECTION · 5-68 M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-8 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 273: Section 14. Protection And Control Modules
SWITCHES CM4 GROUP AND SET/NEXT · 4-3 SYSTEM CHECK-OUT · 7-13 M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-9 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 274 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. April 1, 2007 10-10 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 275 ASYNCHRONOUS DATA CHANNEL MODULES This section contains Instruction Data Sheets for all asynchronous data channel modules available for use with the IMUX 2000 M-DACS Intelligent Multiplexer, as of the date this manual was printed: RFL DA-91I Asynchronous Data Channel Module...
Page 276 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 11-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 277: March
RFL Electronics Inc. I N S T R U C T I O N D A T A RFL DA-91I Two Port Asynchronous Data Polling Channel Module DESCRIPTION The RFL DA-91I is an Asynchronous Data Polling Channel Module designed for use in RFL IMUX 2000 multiplexers.
Page 278 F to +131 Humidity: 0 to 95 %, non-condensing. RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 279 Using Table 1 as a guide, connect all signal wiring to the MA-402I Module Adapter. Refer to Figure 2 and Table 2 for the location of DIP switches on the DA-91I module. RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100...
Page 280 Set the module address using DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 for the desired remote address (SCB address). For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. In most installations the address will be set to the number of the slot the module is occupying.
Page 281 In dual mode it will enable 1 signaling bit. >> text continues on page 8 << RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 282 Test point, TP9 Channel 1 CTS bit RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 283 DOWN NOTE: For SW1, UP = ON and DOWN = OFF. RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 284 TX data output corresponding to an inactive RTS signal. RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 285 For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 286 The RFL DA-91I can provide one or two full duplex channels between an unlimited number of locations using a single 64 kbps DS0 time slot. It can be used in IMUX 2000 Terminal or Drop/Insert multiplexers. The data channels are interfaced to the RFL DA-91I through the MA-402I Module Adapter.
Page 287 RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. The remote interface for these modules involves two codes: a “P” (parameter) code, and an “S” (status) code. See the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for more information on the remote control interface.
Page 288 These are the only legal values for setting the parameters. Setting any parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce an unpredictable result. RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 289 TX_ACT4 → RTS2 RX_ACT4 → RLSD2 RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 290 Connect a patch cord between the EQUIP-T1-OUT and EQUIP-T1-IN jacks on the front of the IMUX 2000 chassis. The jacks are located on the Common Module. With power applied to the IMUX 2000, check the indicators on the front of the power supply module.
Page 291 If not, use standard troubleshooting procedures to isolate the problem to the module itself, to another module in the IMUX 2000, or to the T1 or E1channel. If the problem lies in the RFL DA-91I module, replace it with a spare.
Page 292 A direction. Connect a patch cord between the DS1-B EQUIP OUT and DS1-A EQUIP IN jacks on the front of the IMUX 2000 chassis. The jacks are located on the Common Module. RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 293 If not, use standard troubleshooting procedures to isolate the problem to the module itself, to another module in the IMUX 2000, or to the T1 or E1 channel. If the problem lies in the RFL DA-91I module, replace it with a spare.
Page 294 Refer to the “Maintenance” section in your multiplexer manual for system analysis procedures. RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 295 NOTES RFL DA-91I RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2002 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 296 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 297: February
Seven Port Asynchronous Data Channel Module DESCRIPTION The RFL DA-121I is an Asynchronous Data Channel Module designed for use in RFL IMUX 2000 multiplexers. It converts asynchronous data to a format appropriate for multiplexing and transmission over T1 or E1 lines. Data received is demultiplexed and restored as asynchronous data.
Page 298 F to +131 Humidity: 0 to 90 %, non-condensing. RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 299 As an option, the Adapter Cable is available with different connector types or cable lengths. RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 300 Set the module address using DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 for the desired remote address (SCB address). For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. In most installations the address will be set to the number of the slot the module is occupying.
Page 301 B direction. >> text continues on page 9 << RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 302 Test point, TP0 Ground RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 303 DOWN DOWN RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 304 *** An E1 network utilizing inter-node communications (NMX) cannot use timeslot 31 for voice channel. **** Not valid if signaling is enabled in E1. Time slot 16 is reserved for CAS. RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100...
Page 305 For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 306 The RFL DA-121I can provide up to seven 1.2 kbps data channels incorporating transmitter/receiver pairs in one T1 time slot. It can be used in IMUX 2000 Terminal or Drop/Insert multiplexers. The seven 1.2 kbps data channels are interfaced to the RFL DA-121I through the MA-405I Module Adapter.
Page 307 RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. The remote interface for these modules involves two codes: a “P” (parameter) code, and an “S” (status) code. See the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for more information on the remote control interface.
Page 308 B direction and receive from the A direction. (For guidelines on setting channel module direction, refer to the IMUX 2000 instruction manual). This setting is required when the module is installed in a terminal multiplexer. B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .
Page 309 Service OFF SERVICE RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 310 Not used ↑ - - - - - - - RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 311 Not used ↑ - - - - - - - RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 312 Connect a patch cord between the EQUIP-T1-OUT and EQUIP-T1-IN jacks on the front of the IMUX 2000 chassis. The jacks are located on the Common Module. With power applied to the IMUX 2000, check the indicators on the front of the power supply module.
Page 313 If the above test procedure can be successfully completed, the RFL DA-121I module is functioning properly. If not, use standard troubleshooting procedures to isolate the problem to the module itself, another module in the IMUX 2000, or the T1 channel. If the problem lies in the RFL DA-121I module, replace it with a spare.
Page 314 A bus. Connect a patch cord between the DS1-B EQUIP OUT and DS1-A EQUIP IN jacks on the front of the IMUX 2000 chassis. The jacks are located on the Common Module. RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 315 If the above test procedure can be successfully completed, the RFL DA-121I module is functioning properly. If not, use standard troubleshooting procedures to isolate the problem to the module itself, another module in the IMUX 2000, or the T1 channel. If the problem lies in the RFL DA-121I module, replace it with a spare.
Page 316 Refer to the “Maintenance” section in your multiplexer manual for system analysis procedures. RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 317 NOTES RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 318 NOTES RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 319 NOTES RFL DA-121I RFL Electronics Inc. February 10, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 320 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 321 RFL Electronics Inc. I N S T R U C T I O N D A T A RFL DA-291B Four-Port Asynchronous Data Channel Module (RFL Part No. 108010) DESCRIPTION This Instruction Data Sheet describes the setup and installation procedures for the DA-291B Asynchronous Data Module.
Page 322 4.8 oz (0.13 kg) Shipping: 1 lb (0.45 kg) RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 323 Determine which I/O Adapter Module will be used to make connections to the RFL DA-291B module. Each RFL DA-291B module installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires an I/O Adapter Module. The I/O Adapter Module provides the appropriate connections for the desired interface.
Page 324 Carrier Detect Receive Data B RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 325 Dip switches SW6-4 thru SW6-6 are used to set the timeslot start bit; refer to table 9 on page 13. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 326 Language (SCL) for remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 327 Switch SW10 and SW11 Figure 2. Controls and Indicators, RFL DA-291B Four Port Asynchronous Data Module RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 328 (TX on B, RX on A) Continue to set SW3 thru SW5 as required. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 329 Async module, not between two modules. For example with 19200 baud and 4 as the channel timeslot start bit, bits 4 through 7 are used for this channel. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100...
Page 330 None None RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 331 Down The remaining Channels (2-4) are set in the same manner for SW11-3 through SW11-8 RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 332 SW1-6 Address RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 333 ** The maximum timeslots available is reduced by “1” for an E1 system using CAS when the starting timeslot is between timeslot 1 and 15. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 334 SW9-7 SW9-8 RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 335 The Signal Buffering CPLD consists of a Xilinx XC9572XL used to buffer the signals that pass between the Actel and the RFL IMUX 2000 Motherboard. These signals include the T1/E1 bus signals and the pass-thru signals to/from the I/O. It is important to note that the Xilinx is +3V/+5V signal compatible, and therefore provides the necessary level translation between the motherboard signals and the Actel which only supports 3.3V signals.
Page 336 (SW1) Figure 3. DA-291B Data Module, Block Diagram RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 337 LOCAL/REMOTE LOOPBACKS The loopback logic resides inside the Actel APA-450 FPGA. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 338 DOWN Figure 4. Example of a Three-Node System Using Drop and Insert RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 339 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When the DA-291B module is installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer it can be used under local or remote control. When under remote control, certain configuration parameters can be changed only via the RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. See the IMUX 2000 manual for information on using the remote control interface.
Page 340 In addition to the P codes, it is also possible to turn service on or off for the card by sending SRVC = ON or SRVC = OFF in the ISCL parameter field with a SET command. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100...
Page 341 1. These are the only legal values for setting the parameters. Setting any parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce an unpredictable result. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 342 Bit1 Bit0 Remote Loopback enabled for channel 4 RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 343 Bxxx11111 1. Do not activate time slot 16 in an E1 multiplexer with CAS signaling turned on. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 344 Bxxxxxx01 Bxxxxxx10 RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 345 -------↑ Module service ON RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 346 --↑----- Ch. 1 and Ch. 2 bit overlap RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 347 Undefined (Reserved for future use) -------- RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 348 ↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑ rev. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 349 Most problems occur at the common equipment or facility level. Refer to the Troubleshooting section in your multiplexer operation manual for system analysis procedures. RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 350 Notes RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 351 Notes RFL DA-291B RFL Electronics Inc. April 13, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 352 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 353: August
This section contains Instruction Data Sheets for all synchronous data channel modules available for use with the IMUX 2000 M-DACS Intelligent Multiplexer, as of the date this manual was printed: RFL DS-562I Synchronous Data Module (RS-449, CCITT V.35, G.703, X.21 OR Short...
Page 354 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 12-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 355: June
For RFL IMUX 2000 Intelligent T1/E1 Multiplexers DESCRIPTION The RFL DS-562I Synchronous Data Module provides RFL IMUX 2000 T1/E1 Multiplexers with synchronous full-duplex data communications at either 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps. The RFL DS-562I operates in terminal or drop and insert systems over T1/E1 carrier lines and uses RS-449/422, CCITT V.35, G.703, X.21/V.11, or short haul optical fiber interfaces.
Page 356 Local Loopback (switched): Equivalent to CCITT V.54 Loop 3. Remote Loopback (switched): Equivalent to CCITT V.54 Loop 2. RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 357 Shipping: 1 lb (0.45 kg) RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 358 Determine which I/O Adapter Module will be used to make connections to the RFL DS-562I module. Each RFL DS-562I module installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires an I/O Adapter Module. The I/O Adapter Module provides the appropriate connections for the desired interface.
Page 359 (settings obtained from the SCB), up sets the module for local mode (settings obtained from the DIP switches). Set the switch up. RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 360 SW5-1 selects T1/E1. Right selects T1 carrier, left selects E1 carrier. Set the switch for the format being used. RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 361 SW5-3 selects normal or inverted data. Right sets normal data, left sets inverted data, this setting inverts incoming and outgoing data from the interface. Install the DS-562I into the IMUX 2000 chassis and allow a few seconds for the board to complete its power-up process.
Page 362 Selects spare input Figure 1. Controls and indicators, MA-406IA Module Adapter RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 363 Selects spare input Figure 2. Controls and indicators, MA-406IB Module Adapter RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 364 (factory adjustment) Figure 3. Controls and indicators, MA-407I Module Adapter RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 365 Figure 4. Controls and indicators, MA-408I Module Adapter RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 366 Set all jumpers to DTE Figure 5. Controls and indicators, MA-409IA Module Adapter RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 367 S1-1 to S1-4 toward “DTE” Figure 6. Controls and Indicators, MA-410I Module adapter RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 368 Figure 7. Controls and indicators, RFL DS-562I synchronous data module RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 369 Test point TP5 Ground RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 370 DOWN DOWN RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 371 LEFT * Do not use timeslot 16 in an E1 system which uses CAS (channel associated signalling). RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 372 RIGHT LEFT RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 373 LEFT LEFT RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 374 (detector) and an output section (emitter). The module is mounted at the rear of an RFL IMUX 2000 chassis, directly opposite the DS562I module. The input power requirement is +5 Volts at 175 mA maximum from the chassis supply. The input drive signals are TTL logic-level, generated by the DS562I.
Page 375 Table 12. Short Haul Fiber Interface Module, Controls and indicators Item Name/Description Function JP1 Connector Motherboard connector (connects to the IMUX 2000 motherboard directly behind the DS562I module) DS2 Fiber Data LED Lights green when data (transitions) is present at the fiber optic receiver U7 Fiber Optic Detector...
Page 376 Equipment. When used with the DS562I, the MA-620 complies with the standard for N = 1. The module is mounted at the rear of an RFL IMUX 2000 chassis, directly opposite the DS562I module. The input power requirement is +5 Volts at 200 mA maximum from the chassis supply. The input drive signals are TTL logic-level, generated by the DS562I.
Page 377 Name/Description Function Item Connector Motherboard connector (connects to the IMUX 2000 motherboard directly behind the DS562I module). DATA LED (green) Valid data when illuminated. Indicates that the Fiber Data is valid with no bit errors. Extinguished or pulsing indicates bit errors and or loss of signal.
Page 378 INTERFACING THE IMUX 2000 WITH AN RFL 9745 USING C37.94 FIBER OPTIC MODULES An IMUX 2000 can be connected to an RFL 9745 equipped with a Short Haul Fiber module (107310) as shown in Figure 12. There are no jumpers or settings on the 107310 or the MA620, however SW4-2 and SW4-3 on the DS562I must be set to the ON position.
Page 379 This section describes timing configuration settings when interfacing the IMUX 2000 Multiplexer with other RFL products using RS-449 communications. The IMUX 2000 can be interfaced with the RFL 9300, RFL 9700, RFL 9700A, RFL 9720 and RFL 9745. It is highly recommended that clock and data transitions are confirmed with a scope to insure proper system operation.
Page 380 ECB# 101563: No Clock Polarity Jumper ECB# 101563-1: J2 - “B” Position 97 DIG TX: No Clock Polarity Jumper B. The configuration of the IMUX 2000 RS-449 Channel Card shall be as follows: 1. DS-562I with MA-406IA I/O MA-406IA I/O: J2 jumpers in DCE mode...
Page 381 97A DIG RX: “B” Position 97A DIG TX: “B” Position B. The configuration of the IMUX 2000 RS-449 Channel Card shall be as follows: 1. DS-562I with MA-406IA I/O MA-406IA I/O: J2 jumpers in DCE mode J3 in any position...
Page 382 J6 (Send Timing): “B” Position J7 (Receive Timing): “B” Position B. The configuration of the IMUX 2000 RS-449 Channel Card shall be as follows: 1. DS-562I with MA-406IA I/O MA-406IA I/O: J2 jumpers in DCE mode J3 in any position...
Page 383 J1 (Send Timing): “Invert” Position J2 (Receive Timing): “Invert” Position B. The configuration of the IMUX 2000 RS-449 Channel Card shall be as follows: 1. DS-562I with MA-406IA I/O MA-406IA I/O: J2 jumpers in DCE mode J3 in any position...
Page 384 “sends data” and the other end “receives data’. Confirm both directions by switching the cable ends. RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 385 T1/E1 bus and generates and receives data via an I/O adapter module. The module can be set up and interrogated remotely via the SCB of the IMUX 2000. DIP switches enable the user to set up the module locally.
Page 386 SWITCHES Figure 13. RFL DS-562I Block diagram. RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 387 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When the RFL DS-562I is installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer, it can be operated under local or remote control. When under remote control, most of the module setup parameters can only be changed through the RS- 232 remote port on the shelf Common Module.
Page 388 Inverted data * It is recommended that the TX and RX addresses are both set to a value other than 0 if the addressing function is being used. RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 389 Not currently used Not currently used RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 390 Before starting a loopback test, make sure the following conditions have been met: The DS-562I module and I/O adapter must be installed in an RFL IMUX 2000 chassis. Power must be applied to the system. The module must be out of service.
Page 391 If an error count still persists after these steps have been taken, then check for an outside error source. RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 392 NOTES RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 393 NOTES RFL DS-562I RFL Electronics Inc. June 14, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 394 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 395 (RFL Part No. 107695) DESCRIPTION The RFL DS-562NC Synchronous Data Module provides RFL IMUX 2000 T1/E1 Multiplexers with synchronous full-duplex data communications at either 56 Kbps or any multiple of 64 Kbps, with a maximum limit that is dependent upon the multiplexer type or interface adapter type. The DS-562NC can operate up to 1.536 Mbps in T1 Multiplexers, and up to 1.984 Mbps in E1 Multiplexers;...
Page 396 Local Loopback (switched): Equivalent to CCITT V.54 Loop 3. Remote Loopback (switched): Equivalent to CCITT V.54 Loop 2. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 397 Shipping: 1 lb (0.45 kg) RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 398 Determine which I/O Adapter Module will be used to make connections to the RFL DS-562NC module. Each RFL DS-562NC module installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires an I/O Adapter Module. The I/O Adapter Module provides the appropriate connections for the desired interface.
Page 399 Refer to Figure 7 for the location of switches on the DS-562NC. Perform the following series of switch settings with the DS-562NC removed from the motherboard. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 400 (settings obtained from the DIP switches). Initially, set the switch to the OFF (UP) position for local control. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 401 LAN (MA-427/428). Note that the DS-562NC interfaces directly with the MA- 427/428 using RS-449 signals. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 402 For the initial setup, set the switch to the OFF position. Install the DS-562NC into the IMUX 2000 chassis and allow a few seconds for the board to complete its power-up process. Turn the DS-562NC’s service to ON by placing SW3-8 in the OFF (UP) position. Allow a minimum of 16 seconds to ensure the common module has read all configuration data from the module.
Page 403 Selects spare input Figure 1. Controls and indicators, MA-406IA Module Adapter RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 404 Selects spare input Figure 2. Controls and indicators, MA-406IB Module Adapter RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 405 (factory adjustment) Figure 3. Controls and indicators, MA-407I Module Adapter RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 406 Figure 4. Controls and indicators, MA-408I Module Adapter RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 407 Set all jumpers to DTE Figure 5. Controls and indicators, MA-409IA Module Adapter RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 408 S1-1 to S1-4 toward “DTE” Figure 6. Controls and Indicators, MA-410I Module adapter RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 409 (typical) Figure 7. Controls and indicators, RFL DS-562NC multi-baud synchronous data module RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 410 SW5-3 to SW5-8 Sets the receive address – 56Kbps only, see table 11: RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 411 TP6, 12 and 17 Ground RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 412 (32) (16) RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 413 ** The maximum timeslots available is reduced by “1” for an E1 system using CAS when the starting timeslot is between timeslot 1 and 15. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 414 DOWN * The maximum timeslots available is reduced by “1” for an E1 system using CAS. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 415 0 (disabled) Cont……... RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 416 (32) (16) RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 417 (detector) and an output section (emitter). The module is mounted at the rear of an RFL IMUX 2000 chassis, directly opposite the DS-562NC module. The input power requirement is +5 Volts at 175 mA maximum from the chassis supply. The input drive signals are TTL logic-level, generated by the DS-562NC.
Page 418 3.2 Microseconds Figure 9. Short Haul Fiber Timing Diagram RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 419 Equipment. When used with the DS562NC, the MA-620/621 complies with the standard for N = 1 through 12. The module is mounted at the rear of an RFL IMUX 2000 chassis, directly opposite the DS562NC module. The input power requirement is +5 Volts at 200 mA maximum from the chassis supply.
Page 420 Table 15. Short Haul Fiber Interface Module, Controls and indicators Name/Description Function Item Connector Motherboard connector (connects to the IMUX 2000 motherboard directly behind the DS-562NC module). YEL ALARM LED Yellow alarm when illuminated. Indicates that the remote fiber receiver has (yellow) failed and the remote transmitter is sending yellow code detected by the local fiber receive channel.
Page 421 Verify that the MA-427 LAN Bridge’s switches are set to the defaults described in Table 16 on the following page. Refer to Figure 12 to locate the switches on the board. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 422 LINK LED Figure 12. MA-427 LAN Bridge Module Adapter RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 423 MA-427 Figure 13. Pins 1 and 8 on RJ-45 connector and on MA-427 LAN Bridge RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 424 LED are always on RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 425 Asymmetric bandwidth Prioritization based on VLAN and QoS RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 426 Table 23 Figure 14. MA-428 Enhanced LAN Bridge Module Adapter RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 427 1. The MA-428 module adapter’s ALARM indicator represents various alarm conditions, see Table 28. 2. These indicator lights are located on top of the board. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 428 10 Mbps speed and full duplex mode 10 Mbps speed and half duplex mode RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 429 MA-428 Figure 15. Pins 1 and 8 on RJ-45 connector and on MA-428 LAN Bridge RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 430 Solid Red • Mapper and physical ID are somehow at “0” RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 431 Modes such as unstable link, no link and false link are not preferred, even though there appears to be a link. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 432 • False Link – Even though the link is established, data loss occurs. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 433 INTERFACING THE IMUX 2000 WITH AN RFL 9745 USING C37.94 FIBER OPTIC MODULES An IMUX 2000 can be connected to an RFL 9745 equipped with a Short Haul Fiber module (107310) as shown in Figure 14. There are no jumpers or settings on the 107310 or the MA620, however SW6-5 and SW6-7 on the DS562NC must be set to the OFF position.
Page 434 IMUX 2000 DS-562NC AND RFL 9300 (RS-449, RS-530) Interfacing an IMUX 2000 DS-562NC with an RFL 9300 can be accomplished as follows: A. The programmable jumpers on the 9300 Direct Digital I/O module shall be positioned as follows: J2 (Send Timing): “A”...
Page 435 IMUX 2000 DS-562NC AND RFL 9700 “ORIGINAL” (RS-449, RS-530) Interfacing an IMUX 2000 DS-562NC with an RFL 9700 can be accomplished as follows: A. Configuration of RFL 9700: 97 DIG RX: ECB# 101563: No Clock Polarity Jumper ECB# 101563-1: J2 - “B” Position...
Page 436 IMUX 2000 DS-562NC AND RFL 9700A (RS-449, RS-530) Interfacing an IMUX 2000 DS-562NC with an RFL 9700A can be accomplished as follows: A. Configuration of RFL 9700A: 97A DIG RX: “B” Position 97A DIG TX: “B” Position B. The configuration of the IMUX 2000 RS-449 Channel Card shall be as follows: 1.
Page 437 IMUX 2000 DS-562NC AND RFL 9720 (RS-449, RS-530) Interfacing an IMUX 2000 DS-562NC with an RFL 9720 can be accomplished as follows: A. The programmable jumpers on the piggyback board of the RFL 9720 module shall be positioned as follows: J6 (Send Timing): “B”...
Page 438 IMUX 2000 DS-562NC AND RFL 9745 (RS-449, RS-530) Interfacing an IMUX 2000 DS-562NC with an RFL 9745 can be accomplished as follows: A. The programmable jumpers on the 9745 RS-449 I/O shall be positioned as follows: J1 (Send Timing): “Invert” Position J2 (Receive Timing): “Invert”...
Page 439 “sends data” and the other end “receives data’. Confirm both directions by switching the cable ends. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 440 562I modules at 56kbps and 64kbps data rates and occupies only one shelf location. The module can be set up and interrogated remotely via the SCB of the IMUX 2000. DIP switches enable the user to set up the module locally.
Page 441 SCB interfacing, PLL interfacing, and I/O Adapter interfacing. The Actel ProASIC APA- 150 and its associated circuitry handle all T1/E1 communication engines, Interface communication engines, and SCB of the IMUX 2000. The Xilinx XC9572XL provides buffering between the Actel and the IMUX motherboard signals.
Page 442 T1 transmit and T1 receive buses respectively. Octet timing generation circuits are used if the Octet timing feature is enabled. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 443 T1/E1 transmit and receive bus signals. A three position toggle switch on the module front panel enables the user to select equipment loopback, payload loopback or no loopback. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 444 (SW1) Figure 157 RFL DS-562NC Block diagram. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 445 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When the RFL DS-562NC is installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer, it can be operated under local or remote control. When under remote control, most of the module setup parameters can only be changed through the RS- 232 remote port on the shelf Common Module.
Page 446 ↑ Inverted transmit clock polarity RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 447 ** Subject to limits due to the starting timeslot number and CAS (for E1). RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 448 MA-427/428 (Ethernet Module) installed Invalid 1/O Type or setting RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 449 Either the Service is OFF or has configuration errors. The service is ON and has no configuration errors. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 450 Actel Revision Number ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 451 Before starting a loopback test, make sure the following conditions have been met: The DS-562NC module and I/O adapter must be installed in an RFL IMUX 2000 chassis. Power must be applied to the system. The module must be out of service.
Page 452 5. If the error count persists, then swap modules. Replace the module with another that is known to be functioning properly. If the replacement module is OK, then use the Repair/Return RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 453 If an error count still persists after these steps have been taken, then check for an outside error source. RFL DS-562NC RFL Electronics Inc. July 5, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 454 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 455: October
RFL Electronics Inc. I N S T R U C T I O N D A T A RFL DS-961D Five-Port Multi-Rate Synchronous Data Module DESCRIPTION The DS-961D is a five-port multi-rate synchronous data channel module, designed for use in IMUX 2000 T1 Multiplexers.
Page 456 Power Consumption: 1.2 watts nominal RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 457 The RFL DS-961D module occupies one module slot in the Main Shelf or Expansion Shelf. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. The DS-961D Data Module uses an MA-404A Module Adapter. The MA-404A accepts up to five RS-232C lines via RJ-11 modular input connectors.
Page 458 Set the module address using DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 for the desired remote address (SCB address). For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. In most installations the address will be set to the number of the slot the module is occupying.
Page 459 RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 460 Sheet for more information. Go to step 16. RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 461 For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 462 TX BUSY LED Figure 4. Controls and indicators, RFL DS-961D Synchronous Data Module RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 463 4. When the loop switch is DOWN, all five receive channels are looped back into the transmitter (used for far end loopback during end to end testing). RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 464 ADDRESS NOTE: For SW1, ON = UP and OFF = DOWN. RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 465 DOWN DOWN RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 466 “TX FAULT” LED and send a card-level ALARM to the shelf Common Module. RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 467 TIM- Figure 5. DS-961D Data Module, Block Diagram RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 468 However, the DS-961B does not support DTE timing, so a DS- 961D being used at the other end of a circuit from a DS-961B must have SW3-4 set to the UP position. RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100...
Page 469 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When the RFL DS-961D module is installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer, it can be operated under local or remote control. When under remote control, most of the module setup parameters can only be changed through the RS-232 remote port on the shelf Common Module. See the IMUX 2000 manual for information on using the remote control interface.
Page 470 S1 indicates the transmit status of the card: when S1 = 0, there is no transmission alarm; when S1 = 1, there is a transmission alarm and an ALARM message is displayed. RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100...
Page 471 4. When the loopback is on, all five receive channels are looped back into the transmitter (used for far end loopback during end to end testing). RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 472 Most problems occur at the common equipment or facility level. Refer to the Troubleshooting section in your multiplexer instruction manual for system analysis procedures. RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 473 NOTES RFL DS-961D RFL Electronics Inc. October 14, 2004 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 474 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 475 Frame Relay Users (DYMEC Dynaster 2000): See Application Note at the end of this document DESCRIPTION The RFL OCUDP is a single slot module designed for use in IMUX 2000 T1 multiplexers and provides the interface between a DS0 timeslot of the T-carrier data stream and the 4-wire metallic loop extending to a midspan DDS repeater or the customer premises.
Page 476 MTBF >500,000 hours at 25 RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 477 Determine which Module Adapter will be used to make connections to the RFL OCUDP module. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. The Module Adapter that is used with the RFL OCUDP is the MA-455. The MA-455 provides one RJ-48S jack for connection to the circuit as shown in Figure 1.
Page 478 Set the module address using DIP switches SW1-3 through SW1-8 for the desired remote address (SCB address). For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses for the OCUDP Module are the numbers “1” to “31.”...
Page 479 The following pages show the location of the various configuration DIP switches and LED indicators on the OCUDP board with an explanation of their function. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 480 SW1-3 to SW1-8 Sets SCB address (See Table 2) RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 481 Serial port Used for factory testing RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 482 DOWN NOTE: For SW1, ON = UP/RIGHT and OFF = DOWN/LEFT. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 483 64 kbps NOTE: For SW4, ON = RIGHT and OFF = LEFT. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 484 DIP Switch SW4-8 does not cause these loopbacks; it only permits the function. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 485 Verify module configuration, either through remote control “CONFIG?” user query or through the Network Management System. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 486 For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 487 The RFL OCUDP module reports no module level ALERT or ALARM signals to the shelf Common Module. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 488 RELAY Figure 3. Functional block diagram, RFL OCUDP module. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 489 RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. The remote interface for these modules involves two codes: a “P” (parameter) code, and an “S” (status) code. See the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for more information on the remote control interface.
Page 490 … For convenience, status values are returned both in decimal and binary format. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 491 These are the only legal values for setting the parameters. Setting any parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce an unpredictable result. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 492 P4/3 = X X X RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 493 00 = Design capable of 56 kbps only 01 = Design capable of 56 and 64 kbps RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 494 11111111 RX SIGNAL MAGNITUDE RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 495 Status bits in S4 latch events occurred since the last reset of the Latched Status. To refresh S4, toggle P5 – Bit 7 (Reset Latched Status) from 0 to 1. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100...
Page 496 Status bits in S5 latch events occurred since the last reset of the Latched Status. To refresh S5, toggle P5 – Bit 7 (Reset Latched Status) from 0 to 1. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100...
Page 497 * Based on received signal strength/filter selection, assuming far-end pulse transmission compliant with AT&T Pub 62310 or T1E1/90-051. See LEVEL ONE LXT400 data sheet, Revision 3.2 for more information. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 498 Before starting a loopback test, make sure the following three conditions have been met: The OCUDP module and I/O adapter must be installed in an RFL IMUX 2000 chassis. Power must be applied to the system. The module must be out of service.
Page 499 If an error count still persists after these steps have been taken, then check for an outside error source. RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 500: March
IMUX 2000 OCUDP for Frame Relay Applications This Application Note is specific to customers that use the RFL IMUX 2000 OCUDP to carry 56 kb/s Frame Relay circuits such as the DYMEC Dynaster 2000 The data content in certain frame relay circuits can mimic the in-band control codes in a 56 kb/s OCUDP link and cause the OCUDP to erroneously go into loopback.
Page 501 Notes RFL OCUDP RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 502 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 503: Section 13. Voice Modules
Additional schematics, wiring diagrams, or other documents specific to your application may also be placed in this section. For information on other voice modules that may be available for use with your IMUX 2000 M- DACS, contact the factory or an RFL Sales Representative.
Page 504 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. January 1, 2013 13-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 505 2000 T1 multiplexers. It accepts two voice channels as input and digitizes them; each channel occupies one 64-Kbps time slot on T1 and other digital communications facilities. The RFL VF-5A can be used in both terminal and drop/insert IMUX 2000 multiplexers. The RFL VF-5A provides high-quality voice characteristics, compatible with AT&T Publication 43801.
Page 506 Relative Humidity: 0 to 90 percent, non-condensing. Input Power: 1.0 watt nominal RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 507 Determine which Module Adapter will be used to make connections to the RFL VF-5A module. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. There are six Module Adapters compatible with the RFL VF-5A:...
Page 508 REAR VIEW Figure 2. Connecting two RFL VF-5A modules to a single MA-301 Module Adapter. RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 509 LABEL Figure 4. MA-301B Module Adapter RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 510 Figure 6.) One MA-322 Module Adapter is used for each RFL VF-5A module, and occupies two rear slots in the IMUX 2000 chassis. The MA-322 is used to convert both of the 4-wire outputs (Channel 1 and 2) from 4-wire to 2-wire. The impedance is 600 Ohms, the frequency response is ±2dB from 200Hz...
Page 511 Note: All unlisted pins are not used. Figure 6. MA-322/MA-324 Module Adapters RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 512 Type III signaling, remove jumper E7. Set DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 for the desired remote access address. For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers "1" to "36." In most installations, the address will be set to the slot number of the shelf the module is occupying.
Page 513 19.0 >> text continues on page 11<< RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 514 Removed: Selects Type II or Type III signaling for Channel 1. RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 515 If signaling is OFF, it uses all bits for voice encoding. Signaling should be off when using a voice-grade data modem over a voice-frequency circuit. RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100...
Page 516 SW1-6 Address RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 517 Place SW6-9 in the ON position for normal operation. To enable BUSY OUT (OFF-HOOK) on Channel 1, place SW6-9 in the OFF position. RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 518 NOTE: Each active time slot on an RFL VF-5A module occupies one 64-Kbps digital time slot within the multiplexer's aggregate rate. Consult the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for guidelines on time slot selection. Set DIP switch SW6-10 to control the BUSY 1 output.
Page 519 +7.0 dBm referenced to 600 ohms. An equipment jack on the front of the module allows retrieval of the test tone. RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 520 CONTROLS THE RECEIVE ATTENUATOR. Figure 8. Simplified block diagram, RFL VF-5A Dual-Channel Four Wire E&M Voice Module RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 521 An on-hook (idle) condition is indicated by open circuits on both E and M leads and a closure for off-hook (busy). RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 522 9 dB and the maximum line input would be -7 dBm. Using these settings on the transmit side will place a signal of 1 digital mW into the transmission bitstream. RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100...
Page 523 NOTES: (1) = Settings for 0 dBm in and 0 dBm out. (2) = Settings for -16 dBm in and +7 dBm out. RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 524 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When installed in an IMUX 2000 shelf, the RFL VF-5A module can be operated under local or remote control. When under remote control, most of the module set-up parameters can only be changed through the RS-232 remote port on the shelf Common Modules. See your IMUX 2000 instruction manual for details on using the remote control interface.
Page 525 0 to transmit in the A direction and receive from the B direction. Set it to 1 to transmit in the B direction and receive from the A direction. Refer to the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for guidelines on setting channel module direction.
Page 526 Problems may occur at the common equipment or facility level which affect the operation of this module. Refer to your multiplexer operation manual for system analysis procedures. RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 527 NOTES RFL VF-5A RFL Electronics Inc. June 28, 2005 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 528 The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 529 It allows E&M signaling of Type I, II, III and V, with front-panel busy indicators. It has extended-range input and output signal level settings to facilitate interfaces in most four-wire applications. The VF-5C is remote-controllable when installed in an RFL IMUX 2000 remote-controllable shelf. User-adjustable switches and jumpers allow the configuration of the following parameters: One-channel or two-channel operation.
Page 530 *Signaling is unavailable when using addressing feature. E&M Signaling Types: Jumper selectable, E&M Type I, II, III and V RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 531 F to +131 Relative Humidity: Zero to 90 percent, non-condensing. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 532 4-wire voice lines. This module adapter occupies two rear slots in the IMUX 2000 chassis. A terminal strip is provided for hard wire connections to the voice circuit for Channel 1 and Channel 2, as shown in Figure 3.
Page 533 Figure 6.) One MA-322 Module Adapter is used for each RFL VF-5C module, and occupies two rear slots in the IMUX 2000 chassis. The MA-322 is used to convert both of the 4-wire outputs (Channel 1 and 2) from 4-wire to 2-wire. The impedance is 600 Ohms, the frequency response is ±2dB from 200Hz to 3000Hz,...
Page 534 REAR VIEW Figure 2. Connecting up to three RFL VF-5C modules to a single MA-301 Module Adapter. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 535 LABEL Figure 4. MA-301B Module Adapter RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 536 LABEL Figure 5. MA-301D Module Adapter RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 537 E - Channel 2 M - Channel 2 M - Channel 2 Note: All unlisted pins are not used. See Application Note No.14 in the IMUX 2000 Instruction Manual for additional information on using these I/Os. Figure 6. MA-322/MA-324 Module Adapters RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 538 EG-CH24 Note: Pin 25 and 50 not used. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 539 VF-5C. Set DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 for the desired remote access address. For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid module addresses are the numbers 1 to 36. In most installations, the address will be set to the slot number of the shelf the module is occupying.
Page 540 3. The VF-5C at the remote end will stay in remote loopback mode as long as the 2713 Hz signal is present at the master end. If the 2713 Hz signal is removed, the loopback at the RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 541 _______ Nominal transmit level setting = -16dBm RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 542 Set the position of SW11-8 and SW11-9 to enable or disable FXS/FXO modes for Channel 2 in accordance with Table 1 on page 18 as applicable. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 543 (Note: legal TX addresses are 1 to 127) >> text continues on page 24 << RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 544 Figure 9. Controls and indicators, VF-5C module RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 545 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 TRANSMIT TRANSMIT TERMINAL TERMINAL EQUIP- EQUIP- VF-5C VF-5C MENT MENT RECEIVE RECEIVE FAR END NEAR END 10a. VF-5C at near end configured for Local Loopback IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 TRANSMIT TRANSMIT TERMINAL TERMINAL EQUIP- EQUIP- VF-5C...
Page 546 Amber: Service is ON but either CH1 or CH2 is set to an invalid timeslot. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 547 2. The value of these switches is additive, see the examples in steps 13 and 14 of Installation Instructions. The factory default setting is –16dBm in and +7dBm out. (See Tables 4 and 5 for Tx and Rx Level Settings) RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 548 J10 Jumper J12 Jumper RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 549 SW1-5 SW1-6 RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 550 *** An E1 network utilizing inter-node communications (NMX) cannot use timeslot 31 for voice channel. **** An E1 network utilizing CAS cannot use Time Slot 16 for voice channel. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 551 2. Settings shown on these lines are for -16dBm in and +7dBm out (factory default) 3. Setting the switches for levels outside the range of these tables will cause signal degradation. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 552 NMS. For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 553 41dB to approximately 35dB. >> text continues on page 28 << RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 554 SWITCHES Figure 11. Functional block diagram, RFL VF-5C RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 555 IMUX 2000 Multiplexer T1/E1 Network IMUX 2000 Multiplexer VF-5C VF-5C Terminal Terminal Equipment Equipment Figure 12. Typical transmission only “TO” application using VF-5C IMUX 2000 Multiplexer IMUX 2000 Multiplexer T1/E1 Network VF-5C VF-5C w/signaling w/signaling enabled enabled Handset Handset Figure 13. Typical “push to talk” application using VF-5C...
Page 556 The signaling from the VF-5C to the trunk circuit is on the E lead with open circuit (on-hook) and ground (off-hook). RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 557 Type III Interface Figure 15. E&M signaling types RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 558 A 1-kHz test tone can be injected into the transmit and receive paths to the VF-5C. This is a new feature and does not affect the functionality of the earlier designs. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 559 There are two ways to program the VF-5C module, locally using DIP switches, or remotely using NMS (Network Management Software) version 10.3 or later. Refer to the IMUX 2000 or IMUX 2000E Instruction Manual for information on using NMS. To program the VF-5C module using NMS go to the VF-5C General Configurations Window and Status Window for Node 1, as shown in Figure 16.
Page 560 The Tx Level can be set to between -31 and +10dB. Channel 2 is configured in a similar manner. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 561 When set to disabled, the “2713 Hz Auto Off” parameter is inactive (automatic deactivation of the 2713 Hz loopback signal). RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 562 Channel 2 is configured in a similar manner. The following describes the settings when the “Loopback” tab is clicked. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 563 After all settings are made in the “Chan 1 ” window, set the parameters in the “Chan 2” window. After all VF-5C parameter selections have been made they must be written to the VF-5C card in the network. This is done by using the “WRITE” operation as described in Section 7 of The IMUX 2000 Instruction Manual.
Page 564 RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. The remote interface for these modules involves two codes: a “P” (parameter) code, and an “S” (status) code. See the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for more information on the remote control interface.
Page 565 SRVC = ON SRVC = OFF RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 566 These are the only legal values for setting the parameters. Setting any parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce an unpredictable result. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 567 Ch1 FX Mode Enabled >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 568 Ch2 FX Mode Enabled >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 569 For future use. Do not write to this byte. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 570 UNUSED BIT >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 571 UNUSED BIT >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 572 ↑ - - - - - - - SUB TYPE LOW RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 573 Problems may occur at the common equipment or facility level which affect the operation of this module. Refer to your multiplexer operation manual for system analysis procedures. RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 574 Notes RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 575 Notes RFL VF-5C RFL Electronics Inc. October 8, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 576 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 577: December
RFL VF-6I Single-Channel Four Wire Orderwire Voice Frequency Module DESCRIPTION The RFL VF-6I is a single-channel four wire voice-frequency module, designed for use in IMUX 2000 T1 and E1 multiplexers. It accepts one voice channel as input and uses u-law PCM encoding to convert the analog voice signal into a companded 8-bit, 64-Kbps digital signal.
Page 578 Relative Humidity: 0 to 90 %, non-condensing. Input Power: 1.0 watt nominal. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 579 Determine which Module Adapter will be used to make connections to the RFL VF-6I module. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. There are four Module Adapters compatible with the RFL VF-6I:...
Page 580 REAR VIEW Figure 2. Connecting two RFL VF-6I modules to a single MA-301 Module Adapter. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 581 MA301A-1 Figure 3. MA-301A-1, SWC rated 4-wire Module Adapter RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 582 Label Figure 4. MA-301B-2 Module Adapter RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 583 Note: All unlisted pins are not used. Figure 4. MA-324 Module Adapter RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 584 Refer to Figure 6 and Table 1 for the location of DIP switches on the VF-6I. Set DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 to the desired remote address (SCB address). For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. In most installations, the address will be set to the slot number in the shelf the module is occupying.
Page 585 When SW3-10 is in the UP position, service is ON. If the RFL VF-6I is under local control, the module is enabled. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 586 DOWN: Selects E1 operation. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 587 Lights when data is received from remote equipment (green) RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 588 5. If card is set for T1 operation and signaling is enabled (ROBBED BIT) the logic circuitry robs one bit from the PCM- encoded voice transmission every eighth frame and replaces it with a signaling bit. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100...
Page 589 DOWN DOWN RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 590 Set DIP switches SW4-1 through SW4-8 for the desired amount of receive attenuation. Set DIP switches SW5-1 through SW5-8 for the desired amount of transmit attenuation. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 591 * Time Slot 0 is reserved for E1. ** Not valid if signaling is enabled in E1. Time Slot 16 is reserved for CAS. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 592 BUS B Figure 8. VF6I configured for MTU operation in one bus direction (Bus B enabled) RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 593 Figure 10. VF6I configured for RTU operation in one bus direction (Bus A enabled) at the end of a chain of RTUs RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 594 Refer to the VF-6I Simplified Block Diagram shown in Figure 11. BACKPLANE AND POWER CONNECTIONS The VF-6I occupies a single physical slot in the multiplexer and conforms to the RFL IMUX 2000 backplane signal format. All T1 and E1 backplane signals in and out of the VF-6I are driven with 74HCT125 drivers except for the SCB clock, sync and data signals.
Page 595 SRVC Figure 11. Simplified block diagram, RFL VF-6I Four Wire Orderwire Voice Frequency Module RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 596 EB-LEAD is used. The VF-6I must have J1 removed if to be used as a direct replacement of an RFL VF-6 module. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 597 I/O pin designations for the M-lead and MB-leads are different. Bus-A and Bus-B can be simultaneously enabled for VF-6I. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 598 NOTES: (1) = Settings for 0 dBm in and 0 dBm out. (2) = Settings for -16 dBm in and +7 dBm out. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 599 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When installed in an IMUX 2000 T1 or E1 shelf, the RFL VF-6I module can be operated under local or remote control. When under remote control, most of the module setup parameters can only be changed through the RS-232 remote port on the shelf Common Modules. See the IMUX 2000 manual for details on the remote control interface.
Page 600 <MULTIPLEXER ADDRESS>:<CARD ADDRESS>:SET:P1 = B00000011; RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 601 CONFIGURATION Valid configuration RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 602 These positions represent the five least significant digits of P1, as shown in Table 5. Not valid if signaling is enabled in E1. Time Slot 16 is reserved for CAS. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100...
Page 603 Problems may occur at the common equipment or facility level which affect the operation of this module. Refer to your multiplexer operation manual for system analysis procedures. RFL VF-6I RFL Electronics Inc. December 15, 2011 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 604 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 605 The RFL VF-8A Selective Calling Unit is a two-wire selective calling “party line” module designed for use in IMUX 2000 terminal and drop/insert multiplexers. It accepts a single voice channel as input, and converts it into a 64kbps signal which can be transmitted over T1, E1 or other digital communications facilities.
Page 606 Timing: Cycles of 2 seconds ON and 4 seconds OFF RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 607 MTBF: Greater than 500,000 hours per Bellcore TR-332 RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 608 Determine which Module Adapter will be used to make connections to the RFL VF-8A module. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. The Module Adapter that is used with the RFL VF-8A is the MA-306.
Page 609 Figure 1. MA-306 Module Adapter. Set the module SCB address using DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6. For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. In most installations the address will be set to the number of the slot the module is occupying.
Page 610 Place SW3 to the desired setting in accordance with Table 4. << text continues on page 10 >> RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 611 Test point TP12 Dial tone, busy tone, or ring back tone RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 612 SW1-6 NOTE: For SW1, ON = UP and OFF = DOWN. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 613 Attempts RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 614 For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer instruction manual. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 615 Go to step 17. << text continues on page 13 >> RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 616 2. This switch position can be used to set 0.5 dB increments. See paragraph 14 for details. 3. Factory default level setting. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 617 On the Module Record Card located to the right of the shelf, record the channel bank type, time slot, and any other pertinent information. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 618 50 seconds. BACKPLANE AND POWER CONNECTIONS The VF-8A occupies a single physical slot in the multiplexer and conforms to the RFL IMUX 2000 backplane signal format. All T1 and E1 backplane signals in and out of the VF-8A have drivers with hot-pluggable capability.
Page 619 INPUT/OUTPUT Figure 3. Functional block diagram, RFL VF-8A module. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 620 SLIC is programmed for “Active” mode. Local “ring” and “connection” states are routed to the appropriate bus and into the proper timeslot. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 621 The RFL VF-8A module reports no module level ALERT or ALARM signals to the shelf Common Module. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 622 A phone that has timed out must be placed on-hook to be back in service. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 623 “connected” phone while on-hook. Remaining off-hook when the circuit is busy may result in missed incoming calls. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 624 RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. The remote interface for these modules involves two codes: a “P” (parameter) code, and an “S” (status) code. See the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for more information on the remote control interface.
Page 625 These are the only legal values for setting the parameters. Setting any parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce an unpredictable result. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 626 Increment for lower output levels. Decrement for higher output levels. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 627 - - - ↑ - - - - Timeout not active RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 628 External –48 Volt Battery at each location. (optional) TEST PROCEDURE Determine whether the –48V talk current battery is to be provided by the IMUX 2000 Power Supply or an external source for each location. Verify that the power supply is strapped accordingly at each location.
Page 629 Verify that the counted number is what is expected. Skip this step if configured for an unlimited number of rings. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 630 Refer to the “Maintenance” section in your multiplexer manual for system analysis procedures. RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 631 NOTES RFL VF-8A RFL Electronics Inc. August 6, 2010 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 632 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 633 The RFL VF-15C is a Two-Wire Foreign Exchange Office End (FXO) module designed for use in IMUX 2000 terminal and drop/insert multiplexers. It accepts one or two independent voice channels as input, and converts each channel into a 64 kbps digital signal which can be transmitted over T1, E1 or other digital communications facilities.
Page 634 Channel Differential Delay/Envelope Delay (900 Hz to 2800 Hz @ 1804 Hz ref.): Less than 200μS. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 635 F to +131 Humidity: 0 to 90 %, non-condensing. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 636 Determine which Module Adapter will be used to make connections to the RFL VF-15C module. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. There are four Module Adapters compatible with the RFL VF-15C:...
Page 637 TIP is the top terminal, and RING is the bottom terminal. Refer to Figures 3 and 4 as applicable. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 638 REAR VIEW Figure 2. Using an MA-301 Module Adapter with multiple RFL VF-15C modules. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 639 CHANNEL 2 DROP (BANTAM JACK) Figure 4. MA-303B Module Adapter, used with RFL VF-15C office-end module. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 640 Set the module address using DIP switches SW9-1 through SW9-6 for the desired remote address (SCB address). For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. In most installations the address will be set to the number of the slot the module is occupying.
Page 641 (NMX) is used. >> text continues on page 13 << RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 642 * SW2-1 enables Signaling Delay for both channel 1 and channel 2 in an E1 system configured for normal mode. SW4-1 has no effect in E1 normal mode. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 643 SW9-6 NOTE: For SW-9, ON = UP and OFF = DOWN. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 644 Default See notes for Table 3 on top of next page. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 645 Notes: * This setting is not allowed . Setting switches to this code will cause the module’s service to be disabled. D = down, U = up. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 646 Slide the module into the selected module slot until it is firmly seated and the module front panel is flush with the top and bottom of the shelf. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 647 For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 648 This custom device reads the local switches, controls the LEDs and audio circuits, and interfaces to the bus and common logic module. TO/FROM BUS DRIVERS IMUX 2000 AND RECEIVERS DATA BUS DIP SWITCH...
Page 649 The RFL VF-15C module reports no module level ALERT or ALARM signals to the shelf Common Module. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 650 RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. The remote interface for these modules involves two codes: a “P” (parameter) code, and an “S” (status) code. See the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for more information on the remote control interface.
Page 651 B direction and receive from the A direction. (For guidelines on setting channel module direction, refer to the IMUX 2000 instruction manual). This setting is required when the module is installed in a terminal multiplexer. B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .
Page 652 ↑ - - - - - - - >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 653 These are the only legal values for setting the parameters. Setting any parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce an unpredictable result. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 654 VF-15C (This module present) ↑ ↑ - - - - - - RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 655 VF-15C (DS2 for channel 1 or DS4 for channel 2) should both be ON, indicating an Off-Hook condition. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 656 Refer to the “Maintenance “ section in your multiplexer manual for system analysis procedures. RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 657 NOTES RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 658 NOTES RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 659 NOTES RFL VF-15C RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 660 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 661 The RFL VF-16B is a Two-Wire Foreign Exchange Station End (FXS) module. It is designed for use in RFL IMUX 2000 terminal and drop/insert T1 and E1 multiplexers, and other RFL network interface products. It accepts one or two independent voice channels as input, using PCM coding to convert each channel into a 64-Kbps digital signal.
Page 662 Signal-To-Distortion (1004 Hz to1020 Hz input): 0 to -30 dBm0: Greater than 35.5 dB RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 663 255mA@5V, and 225mA per channel @15V. Note 2: When determining the power capacity in any given IMUX 2000 shelf, the power consumption of the VF-16B is based on both channels ringing one phone per circuit with an REN=1.
Page 664 F to +131 Relative Humidity: Zero to 90 percent, non-condensing. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 665 Determine which Module Adapter will be used to make connections to the RFL VF-16B module. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. There are eight Module Adapters that are compatible with the RFL VF-16B: RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 666 The MA-304B is similar to the MA-304, except it has removable terminal blocks in place of the RJ-11 connectors for the voice connection. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 667 MODULE 3, CHANNEL 2 Figure 1. MA-301 and MA-301C Module Adapters RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 668 REAR VIEW Figure 2. Using MA-301or MA-301C Module Adapters with multiple RFL VF-16B modules RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 669 Figure 4. MA-303B Module Adapter, used with all RFL VF-16B station end modules. The MA-304B Module Adapter is similar in appearance. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 670 Connect to the bantam jacks for the LINE and DROP channels as shown in Figure 4. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 671 Table 7 to select which time slot the module uses. Consult your multiplexer manual for guidelines on time slot selection. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 672 OFF position at the factory. >> Text continues on page 17 << RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 673 Spare Note B – When using module adapter MA-302 or MA-302A always set to the factory default. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 674 The same line fault detection feature is present on Channel 2 (LEDs, DS2). Note B – When using module adapter MA-302 or MA-302A always set to the factory default. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100...
Page 675 SW1-5 SW1-6 RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 676 Dual Analog Note: See page 17 and Figure 7 for a description of loopback modes. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 677 SW2-8 is set in the UP position at the factory. >> Text continues on page 20 << RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 678 DUAL ANALOG Figure 7. Pictorial description of Loopback Modes RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 679 **A T1 network utilizing fast reframing cannot utilize this time slot for voice channel. *** An E1 network utilizing inter-node communications (NMX) cannot use timeslot 31 for voice channel. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 680 SW6-3 is set in the OFF position at the factory to select a Ring Voltage Offset of 0 Vdc. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 681 Go to step 29. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 682 For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 683 RING PCM DATA CONFIG/STATUS INFO SLIC CH2 DRIVERS RING RECEIVERS TO/FROM PCM DATA IMUX 2000 DATA BUS LOGIC ARRAY TO/FROM SWITCHES IMUX 2000 SW1 to SW10 CONTROL Figure 8. Functional block diagram, RFL VF-16B module The PCM output from the SLIC is passed to a logic array. This array multiplexes the voice bits together with signaling bits provided by the microcontroller (On-Hook, Off-Hook, Ringing, No Ringing).
Page 684 The RFL VF-16B module does not report any card-level ALERT or ALARM signals to the shelf Common Module. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 685 “OK” to confirm your selection. This will return you to the parameter window. After all VF-16B parameter selections have been made they must be written to the VF-16B card in the network. This is done by using the “WRITE” operation as described in Section 7 of The IMUX 2000 Instruction Manual.
Page 686 RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. The remote interface for these modules involves two codes: a “P” (parameter) code, and an “S” (status) code. See the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for more information on the remote control interface.
Page 687 SRVC = ON SRVC = OFF RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 688 These are the only legal values for setting parameters. Setting a parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce unpredictable results. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 689 - - - - - - - ↑ >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 690 - - - - - - - ↑ >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 691 - - - - - - - ↑ >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 692 - - - - - - - ↑ >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 693 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ DO NOT WRITE TO THIS BYTE RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 694 Ch1 Offhook >> table continues on next page << RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 695 For factory use only. Should read back as: 1 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 696 Change the settings on both modules, if necessary, to suit the desired circuit configuration. The circuit may now be placed in service. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 697 Refer to the “Maintenance” section in your multiplexer manual for system analysis procedures. RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 698 NOTES RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 699 NOTES RFL VF-16B RFL Electronics Inc. January 17, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 700 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 701 Additional schematics, wiring diagrams, or other documents specific to your application may also be placed in this section. For information on other protection modules that may be available for use with your IMUX 2000 M- DACS, contact the factory or an RFL Sales Representative.
Page 702 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. August 7, 2012 14-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 703 (Includes MTS IRIG-B Synchronization Upgrade) DESCRIPTION The RFL DS-TT Transfer Trip Module is a bi-directional module designed for use in RFL IMUX 2000 multiplexers. This device is also referred to as the MTS module (Modular Teleprotection System). It transmits and receives data via the T1/E1 serial link and generates and receives trip commands via an I/O adapter module.
Page 704 The frequency of the Ping Pong test is selectable by the user. The resolution of the test is 1 millisecond and the accuracy is 1 millisecond each way. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 705 Maximum operate time 5 ms RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 706 99.99% Security (10 BER on IMUX 2000) 1X10 SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY The RFL DS-TT is compatible with all RFL 9001 and IMUX 2000 T1/E1 multiplexers (See note on page 1) OPERATING MODES Full duplex (transmit and receive) POWER CONSUMPTION 2.0 watts maximum...
Page 707 Determine which I/O Adapter Module will be used to make connections to the RFL DS-TT module. Each RFL DS-TT module installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires an I/O Adapter Module. The I/O Adapter Module provides the appropriate connections for the desired interface.
Page 708 Selects Relay or Solid-State output * SW1-6 is used only on units with software version SW2000TT008 or higher. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 709 LAPTOP. (This cable is required for local mode operation only. See page 26). or LAPTOP. (This cable is required for local mode operation only. See page 26). RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 710 Figure 3. Rear panel view of typical 2 function RFL DS-TT Adapter Module Figure 4. Rear panel view of typical 4 function RFL DS-TT Adapter Module RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 711 4 function 250V relay * See NOTE on page 21 for 2 function systems. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 712 Connect all signal wiring to the rear panel of the I/O Adapter Module. Using DIP switches SW1-1 to SW1-5, set the DS-TT module address. For remote access, each channel module in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer shelf must have a distinct module address. For this module, valid module addresses are the numbers “1”...
Page 713 DOWN DOWN RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 714 Figure 6. SYSTEM OVERVIEW The transfer trip module is a channel card for use in the IMUX 2000 system. It transmits and receives data via the T1/E1 serial link and generates and receives trip commands via an I/O adapter module. Up to four trip inputs and four trip outputs can be supported.
Page 715 RELAY Figure 6. Transfer trip module block diagram RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 716 When Function 1 is sent, the block outputs (outputs 1 and 2) are made active. If Function 1 is received the outputs go active as well. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100...
Page 717 This applies only to CM3Rs Rev H or higher, and to transfer trip modules with software version SW2000TT008 or higher. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100...
Page 718 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When the RFL DS-TT is installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer, it can be operated under local or remote control. When under remote control, most of the module setup parameters can only be programmed using the RS-232 remote port on the shelf Common Module. See the IMUX 2000 manual for additional information on using the remote control interface.
Page 719 See notes on pages 19 through 24. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 720 Rx address See notes on pages 19 through 27. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 721 Version 4 or earlier ACTELs. >> Note 2 continues on next page << RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 722 <address>:<subaddress>:SET:P05=B00110010; >> Note 2 continues on next page << RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 723 <address>:<subaddress>:SET:P11=5; <address>:<subaddress>:SET:P11=B00000101; RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 724 = 32 - 24 + 32 + 0 = 40. This can be entered in either decimal or binary format as shown in the following SCL command: <address>:<subaddress>:SET:P13=40; <address>:<subaddress>:SET:P13=B00101000; See paragraph 7.7 of the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for a complete discussion of the SCL commands. Note 5. Tx & Rx Address The use of identical Tx and Rx addresses on the same module is not recommended since it can prevent detection of loopback conditions.
Page 725 Figures 10 and 11 for addressing examples. >> Note 5 continues on next page << RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 726 Pretrip Timer setting as described in Note 2. >> Note 5 continues on next page << RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 727 Invalid >> Note 5 continues on next page << RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 728 Invalid Invalid RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 729 This function will provide a local trip during an MTS communication outage lasting 20ms or more. When activated, the local trip will last for 150ms. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 730 RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 731 RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 732 LOCAL CONTROL INTERFACE When the RFL DS-TT is installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer, it can be operated under local or remote control. When under local control, the module setup parameters can only be programmed using the DS-TT local RS-232 port. The RS-232 port is labeled J1 and is located near the front of the DS-TT module as shown in Figure 1.
Page 733 CRC ERROR ACTIVE PING PONG IS 0 ms.; RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 734 FROM NET ADDRESS = 2 BAD VALUE 15-28-96; RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 735 An indicator capable of detecting operation of the trip outputs. TEST PROCEDURE Once the module has been installed in an operating IMUX 2000 system, the disable switch can be placed in the enable position. The connections to any trip outputs should be disconnected before proceeding with this test.
Page 736 Transfer Trip (MTS) boards. It can be provided in lengths of 10″ (-10), 15″(-15) and 20″ (-20). RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 737 J5 on I/O Board Stacked Chassis Configuration RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 738 IMUX Chassis in Daisy Chain applications RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 739 DS1 on the IRIG-B main module will be illuminated green to indicate that IRIG-B is active. RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 740 Notes RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 741 Notes RFL DS-TT RFL Electronics Inc. January 31, 2008 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 742 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 743 For RFL IMUX 2000 Intelligent T1/E1 Multiplexers DESCRIPTION The RFL Status Module is designed for use in IMUX 2000 T1/E1 Terminal or Drop/Insert Multiplexers. The Status Module can be configured to be a 16 point transmitter, a 16 point receiver or an 8 point transceiver. Since each configuration requires a different module adapter, the Status Module is not remotely changeable;...
Page 744 400ma@150VDC 1A@24VDC Max open circuit voltage: 150VDC Installation: Live insertion/extraction into IMUX 2000 shelf without interruption of the DS1 or any other DS0. RFI/EMI: c.37.90.2, IEC-801-x MTBF (calculated): bellcore tr-332 > 500,000 hours at 25 Power Consumption: 2 watts maximum...
Page 745 Refer to the “as supplied” drawings furnished with the equipment for more information. Determine which Module Adapter will be used to make connections to the Status Module. Each Status Module installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The Module Adapter provides the appropriate connections for the desired interface.
Page 746 Install the Status Logic module into the IMUX 2000 chassis and allow a few seconds for the board to complete its power-up process and to ensure that the common module has read all configuration data from the module.
Page 747 The Status Output module will work with any wetting voltage up to a maximum of 150 Vdc (400mA @ 150 Vdc, 1A @ 24 Vdc). Figure 1. Typical connections to/from IMUX 2000 Status Module card RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 748 8 Output Figure 2. Panel view of Module Adapters MA-601 and MA-602 RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 749 8 Output/8 Input Figure 3. Panel view of Module Adapters MA-603, MA-604, MA-605 and MA-606 RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 750 Board Figure 4. Component view of status input and status output, module adapter boards. RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 751 Test Point TP3 When = 1, a valid frame has been received (For factory test only) RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 752 DOWN DOWN RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 753 The unit is settable to respond in 10ms or 100ms. The 100ms response samples more messages for greater security. RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 754 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Status Module Overview The Status Module is a channel card for the IMUX 2000 system. It transmits and receives data via the T1/E1 serial link and generates and receives status commands via an adapter module. Sixteen total status inputs and outputs can be supported. Setup and remote interrogation normally takes place via the SCB of the IMUX but an additional RS232 port is also available.
Page 755 PORT Figure 6. Status Module Block Diagram RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 756 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When the Status Module is installed in an IMUX 2000 multiplexer, it can read control and status information under local or remote control. When under remote control, most of the module setup parameters can only be changed through the RS-232 remote port on the shelf Common Module. See the IMUX 2000 manual for information on using the remote control interface.
Page 757 Output polarity of 8-15 = inverted >> See next page for notes << RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 758 It is recommended that the TX and RX addresses are both set to a value other than 0 if the addressing function is being used. RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 759 Point 8 status active << table continues on next page >> RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 760 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Presently not used RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 761 Data should be valid (Data bit = 1) Outputs should be unlocked if SW2 is in the DOWN position. RFL Status Module RFL Electronics Inc. July 15, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 762 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 763 The TMX and TMR modules are designed for use in RFL IMUX 2000 series chassis, and each module requires one module space. All module parameters can be programmed remotely via the serial control bus using SCL or NMS.
Page 764 Bellcore TR-332 > 500,000 Hours at 25 RFI/EMI: C.37.90.2, IEC-801-X Live Insertion/Extraction: Capable of live insertion and extraction into the IMUX 2000 chassis without interruption to the DS1 or any other DS0. Input Power Requirements (Typical): +5-Volt Input: +4.75 to +5.25 volts @ 50 ma +15-Volt Input: +14.75 to +15.25 volts @ 70 ma...
Page 765 Bellcore TR-332 > 500,000 Hours at 25 RFI/EMI: C.37.90.2, IEC-801-X Live Insertion/Extraction: Capable of live insertion and extraction into the IMUX 2000 chassis without interruption to the DS1 or any other DS0. Input Power Requirements (Typical): +5-Volt Input: +4.75 to +5.25 volts @ 40 ma +15-Volt Input: +14.75 to +15.25 volts @ 75 ma...
Page 766 The RFL TMX Telemetry Transmitter module occupies one module slot in the Main Shelf or Expansion Shelf. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. The Module Adapter that is used with the TMX is the MA-700 as shown in Figure 1.
Page 767 Set the SCB address using DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 for the desired remote address. For remote access, each module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. It is recommended to set the address to the number of the slot the module is occupying.
Page 768 Each active channel uses one 64 Kbps digital time slot within the multiplexer’s aggregate rate. Set the time slot using direct binary coding as shown in Table 7. Refer to the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for guidelines on time slot selection.
Page 769 Input offset is always “0” when programming the TMX using DIP-switches. Install the TMX module into the IMUX 2000 chassis and allow about 15 seconds for the board to complete its power up process. This insures that the common module has read all configuration data from the TMX module.
Page 770 Selects single ended input for calibration input OUT: Selects differential input for calibration input RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 771 19 18 17 16 Figure 3. Controls and indicators, RFL TMX Telemetry Transmitter module RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 772 LED Indicator DS1 Lights when TMX service is ON RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 773 Calibration data on analog channel 3 only Calibration data on analog channel 4 only RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 774 SW1-6 NOTE: For SW-1, ON = UP and OFF = DOWN. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 775 3. DIP-switch settings are used in local control, and P-codes are used in remote control. See Tables 13 and 17 for P1-codes. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 776 * 0 = Address checking by the TMR is disabled. NOTE: For SW-3, ON = UP and OFF = DOWN. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 777 The RFL TMR Telemetry Transmitter module occupies one module slot in the Main Shelf or Expansion Shelf. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. The Module Adapter that is used with the TMR is the MA-700 as shown in Figure 1.
Page 778 Set the SCB address using DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 for the desired remote address. For remote access, each module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. It is recommended to set the address to the number of the slot the module is occupying.
Page 779 Repeat steps 14 through 19 for analog channels 2-4 as applicable. Install the TMR module into the IMUX 2000 chassis and allow about 15 seconds for the board to complete its power up process. This insures that the common module has read all configuration data from the TMR module.
Page 780 9 10 17 24 23 22 21 Figure 4. Controls and indicators, RFL TMR Telemetry Receiver module RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 781 –8) RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 782 High side of current output for channel 4 Reading depends on load RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 783 Network Management software, however, some selected parameter values are available through DIP switches when operating in local mode. Each of the four analog channels can have independent settings. A block diagram of the IMUX 2000 Telemetry System is shown in Figure 5.
Page 784 TELEMETRY RECEIVER Figure 5. Functional block diagram, RFL TMX/TMR system. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 785 =1/4, would cause the current at the D/A to exceed the maximum output range. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 786 - output offset value: polarity and magnitude. - output gain value. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 787 = ½ = ½ RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 788 = ½ = ½ RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 789 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE When installed in an IMUX 2000 remote controllable shelf, the RFL TMX and TMR modules can be operated under local control using DIP switches, or remote control using either Simple Command Language (SCL) or Network Management Software (NMS). When under remote control, certain configuration parameters can only be changed through the RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer.
Page 790 ANALOG CHANNEL 2 OFFSET POLARITY RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 791 A/D converter. FIXED LEVEL SWITCH RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 792 * This is the only selection available in local mode. It is set using DIP switch SW4-8 for analog channel 1, SW4-7 for analog channel 2, SW4-6 for analog channel 3, and SW4-5 for analog channel 4 (See Table 2). RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 793 2. In the TMR, the offset value (magnitude and polarity) will be added to the data sent to the D/A converter. The output offset magnitude setting equals the number of 200 μA increments. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 794 These are the only legal values for setting the parameters. Setting any parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce an unpredictable result. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 795 OUTPUT OFFSET RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 796 OUTPUT OFFSET RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 797 OUTPUT OFFSET RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 798 OUTPUT OFFSET RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 799 * These are the only selections available in local mode, and are set using DIP switch SW4-4 for analog channel 1, SW5-4 for analog channel 2, SW6-4 for analog channel 3, and SW7-4 for analog channel 4 (See Table 10). RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 800 1. The actual transfer ratio setting is a 15-bit value made up of a 7-bit section (MSB) and an 8-bit section (LSB). 2. The transfer ratio setting represents the number of 1/2048 increments. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 801 ANALOG CHANNEL 1 SIGN BIT RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 802 ANALOG CHANNEL 4 SIGN BIT RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 803 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 0111 1111 RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 804 40mV. For reference see Table 15. After all TMX parameter selections have been made they must be written to the TMX card in the network. This is done by using the “WRITE” operation as described in Section 7 of The IMUX 2000 Instruction Manual.
Page 805 Figure 6. Typical NMS TMX window RFL TMX /TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 806 “0” for the MSB. After all TMR parameter selections have been made they must be written to the TMR card in the network. This is done by using the “WRITE” operation as described in Section 7 of The IMUX 2000 Instruction Manual.
Page 807 Figure 7. Typical NMS TMR window RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 808 After the RFL TMX and TMR modules have been configured, they should be tested for proper operation before they are put into service. Since the TMX transmits only and the TMR receives only the verification test must be performed with both modules installed in their respective IMUX 2000 equipment shelves.
Page 809 Refer to the “Maintenance “ section in your multiplexer manual for system analysis procedures. RFL TMX/TMR RFL Electronics Inc. January 25, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 810 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 811 Additional schematics, wiring diagrams, or other documents specific to your application may also be placed in this section. For information on other video modules that may be available for use with your IMUX 2000 M- DACS, contact the factory or an RFL Sales Representative.
Page 812 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 15-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 813 The IMUX Variable Video System is a two module set that allows transmission of standard video signals over the IMUX 2000. One of the modules, the VS-100, accepts standard NTSC or PAL video and compresses it for transmission. The other module, the DS64NC, multiplexes the signal onto the T1 path and provides for remote programmability of the data rate.
Page 814 If the LED is off the module is defective or is not receiving power. If the LED is blinking then an error condition exists. The controls and indicators on the DS64NC are described in the IMUX 2000 Operators Manual. IMUX 2000 VVS RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 815 CODEC TO CAMERA OR VIDEO MONITOR Figure 2. Hardware configuration, top view. IMUX 2000 VVS RFL Electronics Inc. October 4, 2000 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 816 Figure 3. System block diagram NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 817: Section 16. Special Interfaces
Additional schematics, wiring diagrams, or other documents specific to your application may also be placed in this section. For information on other protection modules that may be available for use with your IMUX 2000, contact the factory or an RFL Sales Representative.
Page 818 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. January 1, 2013 16-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 819 (107495-20). This unit will only connect to external equipment via the Data port and has no connection to the Common Module in the IMUX 2000. A special data cable is provided for this unit (107486-10). All the units are functionally identical except the packaging is different.
Page 820 Rear Panel view of Rear Panel view of MA-490 Telnet I/O 9745 Telnet I/O (105120-3) (107495) Used in RFL 9745 Used in IMUX 2000 RFL TELNET ADAPTER 107495-20 DATA CRAFT Figure 1c. Front Panel view of External Telnet Adapter (107495-20) Figure 1.
Page 821 BOARD C Figure 2. Side view of MA-490 showing location of Boards A, B and C. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 822 IMUX 2000 COMMON MODULE RS232 DATA CON- PORT RFL 9745 AS VERTER APPLICABLE ALL SET TO /NCM POSITION Jumpers J1, J2, & J3 PORT B ETHERNET RABBIT PORT CORE RJ45 MODULE CRAFT INTERFACE RS232 CRAFT FOR SETTING CON- PORT C...
Page 823: April
Console Mode Telnetimeout(s) RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 824 When installing the MA-490 Telnet I/O module in stand alone mode (without an NCM module), a location should be selected at the rear of the IMUX 2000 chassis which is directly in line with a blank slot at the front of the chassis. Make sure the DATA port cable can reach the Common Module remote port or the external equipment RS-232 port as applicable.
Page 825 COMMON SLOT MODULE IMUX 2000 CHASSIS FRONT PANEL OF IMUX 2000 Figure 4. Top view of IMUX 2000 showing MA-490 Telnet I/O installed RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 826 Figure 5. MA-490 Telnet I/O Module adapter, jumper functions, LED functions and connector pinouts RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 827 Connect the External Telnet Adapter to the ethernet hub or switch. The ethernet connector is an RJ-45 which is the commonly used 10BaseT connector for this application. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 828 Cable Pin Designations Figure 7. View of External Telnet Adapter showing connections RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 829 Figure 8. View of External Telnet Adapter showing LED Functions and connector pinouts RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 830 Carefully slide out the Redundant Power Supply I/O from the 9745 chassis while snaking the white connector through the oval shaped hole in the side wall of the card cage. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100...
Page 831 MA-490 TCP/IP parameters and Data port parameters in accordance with your requirements. The instructions for doing this start on page 15. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 832 FRONT PANEL OF RFL 9745 Figure 9. Top view of RFL 9745 showing 9745 Telnet I/O installed RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 833 Cable Assembly Figure 10. Making connections from the MA-490 rear connector to the PC or laptop RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 834 This means that you have accessed the MA-490, and can now use APRIL commands to view lists of parameter settings and other information. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 835 This tells the MA-490 to send a list of APRIL commands called the "main menu" to your terminal. The main menu appears in Figure 9. RFL Electronics APRIL(t) Remote Communications, Version 2.1 (c)1993,1999 H - Display the main menu P - Go to the programming menu (password required)
Page 836 Display current settings and parameter numbers Edit the parameter number “##” RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 837 The new parameter settings can be verified by re-issuing the "D" command to display the parameter settings list. (For more information on the "D" command, go to page 20.) RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100...
Page 838 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k and 57.6k. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 839 999 – System Label A label which can be set by user using any string of letters or numbers. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 840 Enter the "SV" command to save your new system label: MA-490-P>SV RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 841 This gives the version number of the software presently running in the MA- 490 module. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 842: March
The software only allows one user password. If a new user password is entered it will write over the old password. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100...
Page 843 Click on the upper left empty box. This will bring you to the “Display/Change Node” window. Enter a name in the “Site ID” box. This entry is optional. Change the node address to match the Common Module address in the IMUX 2000 that you want to communicate with.
Page 844 You can now access the node using APRIL through the MA-490. Refer to Section 6 of the RFL 9745 Instruction Manual for additional information. RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 845 RFL MA-490 Telnet I/O RFL Electronics Inc. March 6, 2007 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 846 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 847: November
The Network Communications Module (NCM) is an Asynchronous Data Module designed for use in RFL IMUX 2000 T1 and E1 multiplexers. It provides one DCE Half/Full-Duplex channel between an unlimited number of locations using a single 64 kbps DS0 time slot. The NCM provides a fast and reliable NMS communication path between nodes of a T1 or E1 network, and can also be used for party-line applications such as DNP and Modbus networking.
Page 848 Module. Because all of RFL products undergo constant improvement and refinement, these specifications are subject to change without notice. Live Insertion/Extraction: The NCM Module is capable of live insertion and extraction into the IMUX 2000 shelf without interruption to the DS1 or any other DS0.
Page 849 Shelf. Determine which module adapter will be used to make connections to the RFL NCM module. Each module in the IMUX 2000 multiplexer requires a Module Adapter. The module adapter provides the appropriate connector for the desired interface. There are three Module Adapters that are compatible with the RFL NCM:...
Page 850 Set the module address using DIP switches SW1-1 through SW1-6 for the desired remote address (SCB address). For remote access, each channel module in the IMUX 2000 must have a distinct module address. Valid addresses are the numbers “1” to “36”. In most installations the address will be set to the number of the slot the module is occupying.
Page 851 * These signals always active Figure 1. MA-402I Module adapter, connector pinouts RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 852 In “OUT” position, the Tx & Rx paths remain unterminated. Figure 2. MA-485 Module adapter, jumper functions and TB1 pinouts RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 853 Figure 3. MA-490 Telnet I/O Module adapter, jumper functions, LED functions and connector pinouts RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 854 NMS, the parity must be set to the same parity as the local common module. Otherwise, any parity can be used. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 855 9 8 7 6 Figure 5. Front Panel View of RFL NCM, Network Communications Module RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 856 In this example, all inter-node communication is done via the NCM path and FDL (Facility Data Link) is not used. Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 NCM in NMS mode NCM in NMS mode...
Page 857 NCM path, and “talk to” nodes 4 and 5 over the FDL path. If the PC is connected to nodes 4 or 5, communication to all nodes is over FDL. Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 NCM in NMS mode NCM in NMS mode...
Page 858 For RFL use *Used in NMS application mode only. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 859 RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 860 SW9-1 to SW9-8 Not Used RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 861 * If your NCM module is to be used in NMS Application Mode, this switch should be in the Local (UP) position, otherwise you may lose NMS communications if settings are changed. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 862 (Not a valid setting. The NCM module is disabled) Note: enabled = DOWN, disabled = UP RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 863 DOWN NOTE: For SW1, UP = ON and DOWN = OFF. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 864 *** This setting is not valid in an E1 network utilizing inter-node communications (NMX). **** This setting is not valid if signaling CAS is enabled in E1. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 865 For more information on remote access and control, consult your multiplexer operation manual. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 866 (U1) Figure 8. Block diagram, RFL NCM module. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 867 The Network Communications Module (NCM) is an Asynchronous Data Module designed for RFL IMUX 2000 T1 and E1 Multiplexers. The NCM provides one DCE Half/Full-Duplex channel between an unlimited number of locations using a single 64 kbps DS0 time slot. The NCM provides an NMS communication path between nodes of a T1 or E1 network, and can also be used for party-line applications such as DNP and Modbus networking.
Page 868 NCM BACKPLANE AND POWER CONNECTIONS The NCM occupies a single slot in the multiplexer chassis and conforms to the RFL IMUX 2000 back plane signal format. All T1 and E1 signals, and control signals passing through the back plane, interface with the cross point Lattice device (U6). All inputs and outputs of the Lattice Device are pulled up to 3.3V through approximately 50K Ohms.
Page 869 Ethernet Port. The NMS mode is a Broadcast-type application but includes “Address Passing” and “Character Pacing” circuits for the “CM” port. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 870 UART> Once the data is recognized as valid, the data is latched and is ready for transmission. The UART receiver is reset if a framing error, parity error, or break indication is detected. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100...
Page 871 The address frames are received and terminated at the adjacent NCM in the network. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 872 (U11). It generates the 64X Baud required for the UARTS, and clock frequencies used for synchronous timers by other modules in the Logic Array. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 873 Connect a patch cord between the EQUIP-T1-OUT and EQUIP-T1-IN jacks on the front of the IMUX 2000 chassis. The jacks are located on the Common Module. With power applied to the IMUX 2000, check the indicators on the front of the power supply module.
Page 874 If not, use standard troubleshooting procedures to isolate the problem to the module itself, to another module in the IMUX 2000, or to the T1 or E1channel. If the problem lies in the RFL NCM module, replace it with a spare.
Page 875 Connect a patch cord between the DS1-A EQUIP OUT and DS1-A-EQUIP IN jacks on the front of the IMUX 2000 chassis. The jacks are located on the Common Module. With power applied to the IMUX 2000, check the indicators on the front of the power supply module.
Page 876 If not, use standard troubleshooting procedures to isolate the problem to the module itself, to another module in the IMUX 2000, or to the T1 or E1channel. If the problem lies in the RFL NCM module, replace it with a spare.
Page 877 Connect a patch cord between the DS1-B EQUIP OUT and DS1-B EQUIP IN jacks on the front of the IMUX 2000 chassis. The jacks are located on the Common Module. With power applied to the IMUX 2000, check the indicators on the front of the power supply module.
Page 878 If not, use standard troubleshooting procedures to isolate the problem to the module itself, to another module in the IMUX 2000, or to the T1 or E1channel. If the problem lies in the RFL NCM module, replace it with a spare.
Page 879 NMS application mode is the vehicle for NMS communication. Refer to the IMUX 2000 or IMUX 2000E Instruction Manuals for information on using NMS. Go to the NCM module using NMS. Go to the NCM General Configurations and Status window for node 1.
Page 880 (Not a valid setting. The NCM module is disabled) RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 881 A combination of Master, D&I Slave and End Slave modes. Each of these modes is described in the following table. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 882 End Slave The End slave node only receives messages from and transmits messages to the master node Node 1 Node 3 Node 2 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 IMUX 2000 NCM in NCM in NCM in Broadcast...
Page 883 After all settings are made on the Mode page (Figure 13), click on the Port tab to get to the Port window as shown in Figure 14. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 884 Mark Mark RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 885 If the MA485 is configured as two wire, it does not support loopback. After all NCM parameter selections have been made they must be written to the NCM card in the network. This is done by using the “WRITE” operation as described in Section 7 of The IMUX 2000 Instruction Manual.
Page 886 RS-232 remote port on the multiplexer. The remote interface for this module involves two codes: a “P” (parameter) code, and an “S” (status) code. See the IMUX 2000 instruction manual for more information on the remote control interface.
Page 887 SRVC = ON SRVC = OFF RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 888 These are the only legal values for setting parameters. Setting a parameter to a value outside its specified range will produce unpredictable results. RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 889 Undefined >> table continues on next page << RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 890 Not used ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 891 S10 = 3 (B00000011) S11 = 3 (B00000011); RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 892 Configuration is Invalid/MUX Problems >> table continues on next page << RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 893 ↑ ↑ ↑ - - - - - >> table continues on next page << RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 894 For RFL Use Only >> table continues on next page << RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 895 ↑ ↑ ↑ - - - - - >> table continues on next page << RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 896 Not used ↑ ↑ ↑ - - - - - RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 897 Notes RFL NCM RFL Electronics Inc. November 1, 2012 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 898 NOTICE The information in this publication is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise), or stored in any retrieval system of any nature, unless written permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
Page 899 RFL Electronics Inc. IMUX 2000 SNMP Access Gateway User’s Manual RFL Electronics Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton Township, NJ 07005 (973) 334-3100 Publication No. MC2000SNMP Printed In U.S.A. Revised August 10, 2009 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 900 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 901 TABLE OF CONTENTS - SNMP ACCESS GATEWAY USER’S MANUAL CHAPTER 1 - PRODUCT OVERVIEW Figure 1. - SNMP Access Gateway Connectivity Overview 1.1 - - Introduction 1.2 - - IMUX 2000 Information CHAPTER 2 - INSTALLATION 2.1 - Mounting - Power Input Figure 2.
Page 902 Table of Contents CHAPTER 5 - USE OF THE SETUP MENU 5.1 - Networking 5.1.1 - Network Access Enabled 5.1.2 - Get IP Address 5.1.3 - IP Address 5.1.4 - Network Mask 5.1.5 - Default Router 5.1.6 - FTP AutoDelete 5.1.7 - SNMP Manager Setup 5.1.8 - SNMP Trap Setup 5.1.9 - SNMP Community Setup...
Page 903 Table of Contents CHAPTER 11 - PROGRAMMING DATA ALARMS 11.1 - Alarms are the same as Events 11.2 - Alarm Actions 11.3 - How Data Alarms Are Set Up 11.4 - Defining Data Alarms 11.5 - Field Section 11.6 - Operators for Formulas 11.7 - Macro Section 11.8 - Data Alarm Section 11.9 - End Section...
Page 904 Table of Contents CHAPTER 14 - APPLICATION NOTES APP NOTE A. USE OF IP RESTRICTIONS APP NOTE B: MONITORING RS232 LEVELS AS ALARMS Figure 8. Schematic for Sensor Inputs Figure 9. Illustration of Connecting for Monitoring RS232 Control Lines APP NOTE C: IMUX TRAP MESSAGES C.1 Trap Format C.2 Trap Codes C.3 Trap Configuration Information...
Page 905 Chapter 1 - Product Overview Chapter 1 - Product Overview - Introduction The SNMP Access Gateway monitors serial (RS232) data streams for alarm conditions, and provides notification of alarm conditions by audible alarm, pager messages and SNMP traps. The SNMP Access Gateway may be used to provide legacy (non-network) equipment with the ability to generate SNMP traps when alarm conditions occur.
Page 906 1.2 - - IMUX 2000 Information When used with the IMUX 2000 the SNMP Access Gateway connects to the remote port of the IMUX using port 1. Port 2 is used as a craft interface to both the IMUX and SNMP Access Gateway. A serial cable is supplied for connection from I/O 1 to the REMOTE port on the IMUX CM3R.
Page 907 - Power Input The SNMP is powered through the IMUX 2000 chassis motherboard. The SNMP Access Gateway uses a maximum power input of approximately 5 watts, so the maximum current from the IMUX 2000 power supply is about 1 amp. MA810...
Page 908 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.3 - Serial Ports The I/O 2 serial port is configured as a DTE port using a male, DB-9 connector. The I/O 1 serial port is configured as a DTE port using an RJ-12 connector which is similar to that used on the COM ports of an IBM-compatible personal computer.
Page 909 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.5 - Front Panel Items The front panel of the SNMP Access Gateway module has two push-buttons and 8 LED indicators representing status information about the SNMP Access Gateway. The reset (RST) button (S2) is used to reset the SNMP Access Gateway. After the RST button is held in for about 5 seconds, the SNMP Access Gateway will start sounding its audible alarm.
Page 910 Chapter 2 - Installation Each RS-232 port has two LEDs associated with it. The left LED is a received data (RXD) LED. The right LED is a transmitted data (TXD) LED. The TXD LED is normally on and green. The RXD LED is off when no cable is connected to the serial port, and on when a cable is connected.
Page 911 Chapter 3 - Basic Setup for Operation Chapter 3 - Basic Setup for Operation 3.1 - Network Setup As with all TCP/IP- or SNMP-based devices, the SNMP Access Gateway requires an IP address to be assigned to each unit in order to send and receive TCP/IP or SNMP data. The SNMP Access Gateway may operate with either a statically or dynamically allocated IP address.
Page 912 Chapter 3 - Basic Setup for Operation 3.3 - Connections A connection may be made to the SNMP Access Gateway via a network connection. When a connection is made, the user is provided with a menu from which the desired mode of the connection is established. The user may select to enter a command processor mode of operation, or may select a pass-through mode of operation.
Page 913 Chapter 4 - Command Control Chapter 4 - Command Control 4.1 - Command Processor Mode The command processor may be accessed from a network connection. A user enters command processor mode from the main menu by selecting the ‘0’ option. SNMP Access Gateway Model Version 1.00 0.
Page 914 Chapter 4 - Command Control COLDSTART Clear events file, all settings to default Other commands HELP Show list of commands PING Ping an IP Address for testing Pseudo-SNMP Commands Get the value of an object with a specific object ID GETNEXT Get the value of the next object after an object ID GETX...
Page 915 Chapter 4 - Command Control password settings, event (alarm) definition settings, alarm action settings, and other settings. See Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu for further details of the use of the SETUP command. 4.2.5 - EVENTS The EVENTS command is used to view the current status of the events (alarms), view the contents of the events log file, clear contents of the events log file, view the current active alarm actions, acknowledge alarms, and view the history log of alarm actions.
Page 916 Chapter 4 - Command Control 4.3.2 - GETNEXT The GETNEXT command is used with an object ID, and the value returned is the object ID and value of the object which follows the object ID included with the GETNEXT command. 4.3.3 - GETX The GETX command is used without an object ID, and the value returned is that of the last object retrieved by pseudo-SNMP.
Page 917 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu Upon selecting ‘Enter Command Mode’ from the main SNMP Access Gateway menu, the password prompt as shown below is presented for entry of the Command Mode Password. Command Processor Password: ---- Command Password Accepted Upon entry of a valid password the Command Mode Prompt (a ‘greater than’...
Page 918 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu assignment for the unit IP Address. STATIC implies that the IP address is manually entered and in this mode the BOOTP/DHCP sequence is not initiated or allowed by the SNMP Access Gateway. 5.1.3 - IP Address By pressing the Menu Letter of this option a prompt is presented for entry of the Static IP address.
Page 919 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu D. This selection enables/disables sending traps relating to SNMP Access Gateway contact closures and data alarms. The default is ‘Y’. 5.1.9 - SNMP Community Setup Selecting the Menu Letter of this option presents the following submenu for specifying SNMP Community Names. Whenever you do an SNMP operation, whether a SET or a GET, the community name needs to be included as part of that operation.
Page 920 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu 1200 2400 4800 9600 G. 19200 Selection [G]? Setup: Serial Ports: I/O 1 W,P,S A. 8,N,1 B. 7,E,1 C. 7,O,1 D. 7,N,1 Selection [A]? DTR Low Except When Pass-Through Active [N]? This last option turns on or off DTR handshaking with the device connected to I/O port 1 or 2 that one is accessing directly.
Page 921 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu 2. Sensor 2 smoke Closed 3 (T)1,(P)2 3. Sensor 3 flood Closed 3 (T)1,(P)3 4. Sensor 4 famine Closed 3 (T)1,(P)4 5. Sensor 5 pestilence Closed 3 (T)1,(P)5 6. Sensor 6 layoffs Closed 3 (T)1,(P)6 Selection?
Page 922 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu equalfour_1=lastdigit="4" greatfour=all,1,T1,A1hours greatfour_1=lastdigit>"4" lessfour=all,1,T1,A1hours lessfour_1=lastdigit<"4" notfour=all,1,T1,A1hours notfour_1=lastdigit!"4" [end] 5.4.4 - Alarm Evaluator Enabled Selecting the Menu Letter of this option enables/disables the operation of any existing alarm file loaded into the memory. 5.4.5 - Store Data Record Events Selecting the Menu Letter of this option enables/disables the storage in the Events file of ‘Data’...
Page 923 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu 5.5.1 - Traps Selecting the Menu Letter of this option presents a set of options to define the ‘payload’ variable which is included in all SNMP traps when sent. The current trap configuration is illustrated at the top of this menu. The default configuration is shown below.
Page 924 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu Pager Message - In the case of an Alphanumeric pager this entry contains an optional text message which is included in the pager message whenever an alarm is sent to this pager. In the case of a numeric pager, this is the number which is transmitted as the message to the numeric pager.
Page 925 Chapter 5 - Use of the SETUP Menu 5.7.2 - Operational Settings Selecting the Menu Letter of this option presents the following submenu for setting several general operational settings of the SNMP Access Gateway. Setup: General Settings: Operational Settings A. Escape Character [27] B.
Page 926 Chapter 6 - Pass-Through Mode Chapter 6 - Pass Through Mode Pass-through mode may be accessed from a network connection. A user enters pass-through mode from the main menu by selecting either the ‘1’ or ‘2’ option. The ‘1’ option provides pass-through access to serial port I/O 1, and the ‘2’...
Page 927 Chapter 6 - Pass-Through Mode In pass-through access mode, each character the user inputs by network connection is passed to the serial I/O port, and each character which is received by the serial I/O port is passed through to the network connection. During this time, the data from the port is NOT processed by the event and alarm evaluator, so no alarm records are detected during this pass-through access.
Page 928 Chapter 7 - Console Mode Chapter 7 - Console Mode When the serial I/O ports are in console mode, characters which are received on one serial I/O port are sent out the other serial I/O port. This allows the SNMP Access Gateway to be placed in-line between two piece of equipment (such as a control console and a piece of equipment, hence the console mode name), and monitor the data flow between the devices for alarm conditions.
Page 929 Chapter 8 - Management Information Base (MIB) Chapter 8 - Management Information Base (MIB) The following illustrates the SL-60 MIB in tree format. The function of each of these objects is explained in the chapter following this one. This MIB is supplied on a disk with your unit in ASN.1 format. The various object Ids are listed out with their complete prefixes omitted.
Page 930 Chapter 8 - Management Information Base (MIB) 6.2.1.1 - snmpMgrIndex 6.2.1.2 - snmpManagerIp 6.2.1.3 - snmpManagerName 6.3 - snmpTrapsAutoRepeatTime 6.4 - snmpSendTestTrap 7 - ftpsetup 7.1 - ftpAutoDelete 8 - events 8.1 - eventsControl 8.1.1 - storeDataEvents 8.1.2 - storeAlarmEvents 8.1.3 - storeResetEvents 8.1.4 - storeCommandLog 8.1.5 - storeSensorEvents...
Page 931 Chapter 8 - Management Information Base (MIB) 9.2.1.1 - pagerTableIndex 9.2.1.2 - pagerType 9.2.1.3 - pagerPhonenumber 9.2.1.4 - pagerID 9.2.1.5 - pagerDialDelay 9.2.1.6 - pagerHangupDelay 9.2.1.7 - pagerMessage 9.2.1.8 - pagerSendId 9.2.1.9 - pagerSendReason 9.2.1.10 - pagerMaxAttempts 9.2.1.11 - pagerAttempts 9.2.1.12 - pagerAttemptDelay 9.2.1.13 - pagerRepeat 9.2.1.14 - pagerRepeatDelay...
Page 932 Chapter 8 - Management Information Base (MIB) 11.4.1.5 - connectionsPTTimelimit 12 - alarmhistory 12.1 - actionQueue 12.1.1 - actionCount 12.1.2 - actionTable 12.1.2.1 - actionTableEntry 12.1.2.1.1 - actionTableIndex 12.1.2.1.2 - actionAcked 12.1.2.1.3 - actionReason 12.1.2.1.4 - actionReasonID 12.1.2.1.5 - actionReasonLevel 12.1.2.1.6 - actionType 12.1.2.1.7 - actionTypeID 12.1.2.1.8 - actionRepeatTime...
Page 933 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control The following section describes in detail the contents of the custom SNMP Access Gateway MIB, including notes about how these MIB object may be used. 9.1 - productIds Items this section...
Page 934 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control numberPorts This integer is the number of serial ports found installed in the SNMP Access Gateway unit. the standard SNMP Access Gateway this will be 2. portSetupTable This table is used to retrieve and set the serial port settings, for the baud rate, word length and parity.
Page 935 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control snmpSendTestTrap When this object is set to any value, then the SNMP Access Gateway sends a ‘test’ trap by sending trap managers snmpManagerTable. This test trap may be used to assure that the proper SNMP managers are set up in smpManagerTable, that each...
Page 936 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control dataAlarmName This object is a text string which is the name associated with the data alarm, as defined in the alarms configuration file. dataAlarmCounter This integer current count received alarm records which match the data alarm equation corresponding to this data alarm.
Page 937 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control dataAlarmString This text string object contains the last data record which was received which matched the data alarm equation associated with this data alarm. Since data records may be received after a data alarm initiates actions,...
Page 938 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control sensorAlarmCounter This read-only object holds the number of seconds that sensor alarm been active state. For a contact closure input this counter is the number of seconds that the contact closure has been sensed in the (opened or closed) active state.
Page 939 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control pagerDialDelay This integer is the number of seconds that the SNMP Access Gateway waits for modem carrier after dialing the pagerPhonenumber when the pager is in alphanumeric mode, or the number of seconds the SNMP Access Gateway...
Page 940 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control trapAlarmName When the trapAlarmName object is set to 0, then the name associated with the alarm (sensor, data alarm) which caused the trap to be issued is not included trap alarm string. When trapAlarmName object is set to 1, then the name associated with the alarm which caused the trap to be issued is included in the trap alarm string.
Page 941 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control modemParity This integer controls parity modem port. Values are 1 - 7 bits, even parity, 2 - 7 bits, odd parity, and 3 - 8 bits, no parity. value of 3 would normally be used with the SNMP Access Gateway.
Page 942 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control connectionsAddress This object holds the IP address of the remote end of a connection. If the connection is a modem connection, this will show object 0.0.0.0. connectionsCmdActive This object shows if any command connection is active.
Page 943 Chapter 9 - SNMP Configuration and Control historyReasonID This integer object indicates the identifier for the reason why the action was taken as shown in the actionReasonID object. historyReasonLevel This integer object indicates the alarm level for the reason why the action was taken as shown in the actionReasonLevel object.
Page 944 Chapter 10 - Using FTP Chapter 10 - Using FTP The SNMP Access Gateway contains an FTP server which may be used with TCP/IP FTP client software. The FTP server may be used to retrieve or delete the events log file, load or retrieve the alarms configuration file, load a settings file, and load new application software into the SNMP Access Gateway.
Page 945 Chapter 11 - Programming Data Alarms Chapter 11 - Programming Data Alarms Data Alarms (or Alarm Formulas) are formulas set up to define what record(s) constitute an alarm condition. Alarm Formulas can be defined to activate upon the receipt of a single record, or only after X number of matching records have been received within X duration.
Page 946 Chapter 11 - Programming Data Alarms areacode=64,3 localprefix=63,3 anyphrase=*,10 [macros] Outgoing= Incoming=intrunk=”DN====” LongDistance=onefield=”1” [dataalarms] TollFraud1=all,1,P12B1S3C1256,2Hours TollFraud1_1= areacode=”900” or (longdistance=FALSE and localprefix=”976”) TollFraud2=12,20,T12,1Hours TollFraud2_1=Outgoing=FALSE and duration<”00:00:01” [end] This sample alarm text file shows the definition of Fields, Macros, and Data Alarms. In all cases, the above text entry is not case sensitive, except for the literal text specified for record matching (if you say xyz=”cat”...
Page 947 Chapter 11 - Programming Data Alarms 11.7 - Macro Section Macros are similar to alarm formulas, in that they are designed to test conditions against an incoming record. Before the evaluation of any alarm formulas, all defined macros are evaluated against the incoming record, resulting in a TRUE or FALSE evaluation of each macro.
Page 948 Chapter 11 - Programming Data Alarms - Only Port 1 ports=1 ports=12 - Ports 1 and 2 - Ports 1 and 2 ports=all threshold - This entry specifies how many matching records must be received before the alarm action is initiated.
Page 949 Chapter 12 - Use of the EVENTS command Chapter 12 - Use of the EVENTS Command The EVENTS command enters a menu which allows you to view and control matters relating to existing or past Event (Alarm) conditions. Within this section you can view the current condition of sensor inputs and serial alarm parameters, records of all past events, and view and clear currently outstanding alarm conditions.
Page 950 Chapter 12 - Use of the EVENTS command 12.4 - Acknowledge Active Alarms Selecting the Menu Letter of this option acknowledges any and all alarms currently in the queue for alarm notification. These are alarms for which the associated alarm actions are in the Action Queue for handling, whether in progress or not.
Page 951 Chapter 12 - Use of the EVENTS command 01: 04/08 12:01 equalfour Trap 02: 04/08 12:01 greatfour Trap 03: 04/08 12:00 greatfour Pager OK 04: 04/08 12:00 equalfour Buzzer 05: 04/08 11:59 greatfour Trap 06: 04/08 11:59 greatfour Trap 07: 04/08 11:59 equalfour Trap...
Page 952 Chapter 13 - Resetting the SNMP Acess Gateway Chapter 13 - Resetting the SNMP Access Gateway There are several methods for resetting the SNMP Access Gateway to various degrees. The RST (RESET) button is located on the front panel. The RST button “reboots” the SNMP Access Gateway when you press the button for three seconds.
Page 953 Chapter 14 - Application Notes Chapter 14 - Application Notes The following chapter contains various articles which discuss in more technical detail specific application examples and peculiarities in using the SNMP Access Gateway. This section may be frequently updated as new articles are written covering various subjects.
Page 954 App Note A: Use of IP Restrictions App Note A. Use of IP Restrictions IP Restrictions can be established to limit which IP Addresses are allowed access to the SNMP Access Gateway. The IP Restrictions menu can be found in the Networking section of the SETUP menu. By using this menu you can enter in IP addresses into a table to specify which addresses are allowed access and which addresses are denied access to the unit.
Page 955 App Note B: Monitoring RS232 Levels as Alarms App Note B: Monitoring RS232 Levels as Alarms The following diagram shows the circuit design of the Sensor Inputs. This design allows these inputs to be used either as a dry contact closure input, or as an analog input. 100K 4.7K 100pF...
Page 956 App Note C: IMUX TRAP Messages App Note C: IMUX TRAP messages C.1 Trap Format The gateway has been designed to work specifically with all versions of CM-4 software. RS232 trap messages are created by the IMUX and sent to the SAG. This allows the gateway to generate SNMP traps as a result of a message from the IMUX.
Page 957 App Note C: IMUX TRAP Messages C.2 Trap Codes The table provided below lists all of the possible traps from the system.. Alarm numbering begins at 100 and is structured as follows: SOURCE DESCRIPTION O/VIEW VARBIND Variable Value Range STATUS Interface ALERT AT CHANNEL CARD # CRITICAL...
Page 958 RFL will repair or, at its option, replace components that prove to be defective at no cost to the Customer. All equipment returned to RFL Electronics Inc. must have an RMA (Return Material Authorization) number, obtained by calling the RFL Customer Service Department.
Page 959 Chapter 16 - - Canadian Dept. of Comm. Notice Chapter 16 - Canadian Dept. of Comm. Notice NOTICE: The Canadian Department of Communications Label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Page 960 Chapter 16 - - Canadian Dept. of Comm. Notice Avertissement. - L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-meme; il doit avior recours a un service d’inspection des installations électriques, ou a electricien, selon le cas. L’indice de charge (IC) assigné a chaque dispositif terminal indique, pour éviter toute surcharge, le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut etre raccodée a un circuit téléphonique bouclé...
Page 961: Section 17. Application Notes (Appendix I)
Section 17. APPLICATION NOTES (APPENDIX I) This section contains application notes, which are intended to assist users in configuring IMUX 2000 systems. The following application notes are included in this section: Application Notes Pages Revision App. Note 14. IMUX 2000 Resetting Common Modules: Factory...
Page 962 This page intentionally left blank MDACST1 RFL Electronics Inc. June 4, 2007 17-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 963 RFL Electronics, Inc. IMUX Application Note 14. Rev. 08.30.2001 IMUX 2000 RESETTING COMMON MODULES: FACTORY CONFIGURATION AND MODULE CHARTS RFL IMUX multiplexers store programming information of various operational parameters, in order to accommodate particular requirements of system (DS1) and channels (DS0).
Page 964 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 14. FACTORY RESET. The Factory Reset command is available from the "hidden menu group" of the front-panel controls. To access it, scroll through available groups with the upper toggle switch (GROUP) until reaching menu DIAG. While still depressing GROUP switch, press the lower toggle (SET) to enter the hidden group.
Page 965 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 14. CHART RESET. Chart Reset command is available from the same "hidden menu group" of the front-panel controls as Factory Reset. Chart Reset pertains only to Channel Modules (DS0-level) configuration. The Common Module maintains a "Chart", listing individual Channel Modules in the shelf and their configuration.
Page 966 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 14. REDUNDANT COMMON MODULES. Redundant Common Modules (CM-3R, as of this writing) have special facilities to preserve both Common Module and Channel Module configuration parameters when switching between Main and Standby Module. Factory Reset and Chart Reset commands affect configuration; when issued to the active Common Module, they are automatically copied to the inactive Module.
Page 967 RFL Electronics, Inc. IMUX Application Note 15. Rev. 08.30.2001 IMUX 2000 MODULE CONFIGURATION STORAGE: LOCAL/REMOTE OPERATION AND MODULE CHARTS RFL IMUX multiplexers have the ability to store and control programming information of various operational parameters, both on port (DS1) and on channel (DS0) level.
Page 968 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 15. Parameters pertaining to the DS1 port are stored within the Common Module containing that port interface. That is, in a Drop-and-Insert shelf, DI-A is programmed with parameters for port A, while DI-B holds settings for port B. In a Terminal shelf, DS1 configuration is contained within the Terminal Module.
Page 969 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 15. Local Control. When "smart" Channel Modules are set to operate under local control, they accept settings from the on-board switches. Common Module will read that configuration and store it in an internal Chart. This is a continuous process: information is always copied from the DIP-switch settings and is immediately updated if the switches are changed.
Page 970 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 15. INITIAL PROGRAMMING OF REMOTE CHANNEL MODULES. Channel Modules operating under remote control use configuration information stored in Common Module's Chart. There are two obvious methods of entering such configuration into the Chart: Initial operation in Local Mode.
Page 971 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 15. PROCEDURE TO PERMANENTLY REMOVE CHANNEL MODULE. • Under local control: set SRVC switch to OFF. • Under remote control: set SRVC parameter to OFF. • Remove card from shelf. • To reinstall module: insert into shelf and set SRVC to ON (Common Modules retain channel configuration parameters even with the channel card removed).
Page 972 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 15. Proper replacement technique of a Common Module of unknown provenance should allow for deletion of unknown configuration and loading of new, desired parameters. It is very important to remember that the controller for shelf management resides within Drop-and-Insert A (or Terminal) Module.
Page 973 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 15. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE REDUNDANT COMMON MODULE. • Ascertain that the shelf is operational with the currently ACTIVE module. • Remove the INACTIVE Redundant Common Module. • Insert replacement. • Observe blinking green activity indicator next to the alphanumeric display.
Page 974 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 15. NOTES apnote15 page: 8 of revised 08/30/2001 printed 11/1/2006 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 975 RFL Electronics, Inc. IMUX Application Note 17. Rev. 03.26.2002 IMUX 2000 IMPLEMENTATION OF REMOTE ALARM SIGNALING INTRODUCTION. RFL IMUX multiplexers and DACS utilize slightly modified forms of common DS1-based signaling methods to transmit alerts between nodes. This customization reflects the needs of primary target of RFL products:...
Page 976 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 17 ALL ONES. Format. Unframed All Ones (UA1) is sometimes referred to as Blue Alarm or Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). UA1 is defined as a DS1 signal consisting only of alternating line pulses, that is, containing value 1 in each payload and framing position.
Page 977 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 17 REMOTE ALARM. Format. Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) is sometimes referred to as Yellow Alarm or Receive Remote Alarm (RRA). RAI is defined as an ESF T1 signal containing a specific pattern within its overhead (FDL) stream. In SF framing, RAI signal contains a specific pattern in the last bit of each timeslot.
Page 978 RFL Electronics IMUX Ap-Note 17 Notes apnote17 page: 4 of revised 03/26/2002 printed 11/1/2006 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 979 OVERVIEW. The Alarm Configuration Module will provide the interface between the IMUX 2000 Motherboard and the Power Supply I/O. The Alarm Configuration Module will rout the signals from the Motherboard to the Power Supply I/O necessary to drive the Alert/Alarm contacts correctly.
Page 980 RFL Electronics Application Note AN2000-019 Motherboard Power Supply I/O Alarm Configuration Module installed Plan View of IMUX 2000 Chassis (typical) NORMAL TPU-ALERT NORMAL TPU-ALARM Alarm Configuration Module Figure 1. Alarm Configuration Module with Jumper positions There are two failure situations that can occur: A.
Page 981: Section 18. Accessory Equipment And System Drawings
Section 18. ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM DRAWINGS M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 18-1 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .
Page 982 This page intentionally left blank M-DACS-T1 RFL Electronics Inc. October 25, 2004 18-2 (973) 334-3100 B e c a u s e R F L ™ a n d H u b b e l l ® h a v e a p o l i c y o f c o n t i n u o u s p r o d u c t i mp r o v e me n t , we r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o c h a n g e d e s i g n s a n d s p e c i ﬁ c a t i o n s wi t h o u t n o t i c e .

RFL Electronics IMUX 2000 Instruction Manual

Quick Links

Need help?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for RFL Electronics IMUX 2000

Summary of Contents for RFL Electronics IMUX 2000